Pioneer Super Tuner III D AVH-P6550DVD Operation Manual
Operation Manual A V Receiver/D VD Pla yer with 6.5 inch Wide Displa y A VH-P6550D VD English
Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instruct ions so you will know how to operate your model properly . A fter you have finished read ing the instructio ns, put them away in a safe place for future r eference. Be sure to read this ! Playable discs 6 ! DVD video disc r egion numbers 6 ! When an operation is prohibited 8 Precautions IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS 5 T o ensure safe driving 5 T o avoid batter y exhaustion 5 Before Y ou Start About this unit 6 About this manual 6 P recautions 6 F eatures 7 T o protect the LCD screen 8 F or viewing LCD comfortably 8 Condition memor y 8 What the marks on DVDs indicate 8 Resetting the microprocessor 8 Use and care of the remote control 9 What îÂÂs What Head unit 11 Remote control 13 Basic Operations T urning the unit on and selecting a source 16 Loading a disc 16 Adjusting the volume 17 T urning the unit off 17 Using the rear display 17 T ouch panel key basic operation 18 Opening and closing the LCD panel 19 Changing the wide screen mode 20 Adjusting the picture adjustment 21 P rotecting your unit from theft 22 T uner Listening to the radio 23 Introduction of advanced tuner operation 24 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 24 T uning in strong signals 24 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 25 Playing DVD video discs W atching a DVD video 26 Operating the DVD menu 27 Skipping back or for ward to another title 27 Stopping playback 27 Introduction of advanced DVD video operation 28 Repeating play 28 P ausing DVD video playback 28 F rame-by-frame playback 28 Slow motion playback 29 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time 29 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 30 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 30 Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) 31 Playing Video CDs W atching a Video CD 32 Stopping playback 33 Introduction of advanced Video CD operation 33 Repeating play 33 P ausing Video CD playback 34 Contents En 2
F rame-by-frame playback 34 Slow motion playback 34 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time 35 Selecting audio output 35 Playing CDs Listening a CD 36 Stopping playback 36 Introduction of advanced CD operation 37 Repeating play 37 Playing tracks in a random order 37 Scanning tracks of a CD 37 P ausing CD playback 38 Searching for a desired track 38 Entering disc titles 38 Using CD TEXT functions 39 Playing MP3 Listening MP3 40 Stopping playback 41 Introduction of advanced MP3 operation 41 Repeating play 41 Playing tracks in a random order 42 Scanning folders and tracks 42 P ausing MP3 playback 42 Searching for a desired track in the current folder 43 Displaying text information on MP3 disc 43 Scrolling text information in the display 43 Selecting folders from the folder name list 43 Multi-CD Player Listening a CD 44 50-disc multi-CD player 44 Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 45 Repeating play 45 Playing tracks in a random order 45 Scanning CDs and tracks 46 P ausing CD playback 46 Using ITS playlists 46 Using disc title functions 47 Using CD TEXT functions 48 Using compression and bass emphasis 49 TV tuner W atching the TV tuner 50 Introduction of advanced TV tuner operation 51 Storing and recalling broadcast stations 51 Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 51 Selecting the countr y group 52 DVD Player Playing a disc 53 T urning the DVD player on or off 53 Selecting a disc 54 Introduction of advanced DVD player operation 54 Repeating play 54 P ausing disc playback 55 Playing tracks in a random order 55 Scanning tracks of a CD 55 Using ITS playlists 55 Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments 56 Using balance adjustment 56 Using the equalizer 57 Adjusting bass and treble 58 Adjusting loudness 58 Using subwoofer output 59 Using non fading output 59 Using the high pass filter 59 Adjusting source levels 60 En 3 Contents
Compensating for equalizer cur ves (EQ- EX) 60 Setting the sound focus equalizer (SFEQ) 61 Digital Signal Processor Introduction of DSP adjustments 62 Using the sound field control 62 Using the position selector 63 Using balance adjustment 63 Adjusting source levels 64 Using the dynamic range control 64 Using the dual mono mode 64 Using the direct control 65 Using the Dolby P ro Logic 65 Setting the speaker setting 65 Selecting a cut-off frequency 66 Adjusting the speaker output levels 67 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 67 Adjusting the time alignment 68 Using the equalizer 68 Setting up the DVD player Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 70 Setting the subtitle language 70 Setting the audio language 71 Setting the menu language 71 Setting assist subtitles on or off 71 Setting angle icon display 72 Setting the aspect ratio 72 Setting the parental lock 72 Setting remote control code type 73 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 74 Setting the FM tuning step 74 Setting the AM tuning step 74 Switching the warning tone 75 Switching the auxiliar y setting 75 Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller 75 Correcting distorted sound 76 Switching the sound muting/attenuation 76 Switching the automatic disc playback 76 Switching the dimmer setting for sub- display 77 Other Functions Introduction of setup adjustments 78 Setting the video input 78 Setting for back-up camera 78 Setting the automatic open function 79 Setting the clock 79 Using the AUX source 80 Switching the background display 80 Using the PGM button 81 Additional Information T roubleshooting 82 Error messages 84 DVD player and care 85 DVD discs 85 CD-R/CD-RW discs 85 MP3 files 86 Using the display correctly 87 Language code chart for DVD 89 T erms 90 Specifications 93 Contents En 4
IMPORT ANT SA FEGUARDS Please read all of these instructions regarding your display and retain them for future refer- ence. 1 Read this manual fully and carefully before operating your display . 2 Keep this manual handy for future refer - ence. 3 Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions care- fully . 4 Do not allow other persons to use this sys- tem until they have read and understood the operating instructions. 5 Do not install the display wher e it may (i) obstruct the driver î s vision, (ii) impair the performance of any of the vehicle î s operat- ing systems or safety featur es, including air bags, or (iii) impair the driver î s ability to safely operate the vehicle. 6 As with any accessory in your vehicle î si n - terior , the display should not divert your attention from the safe operation of your vehicle. If you experience dif ficulty in oper - ating the system or r eading the display , please park safely before making adjust- ments. 7 Do not attempt to install or service your display by yourself. Installation or servi- cing of the display by persons without training and experience in electr onic equipment and automo tive accessorie s may be dangerous and could expose you to the risk of electric shock or other ha- zards. 8 Please remember to wear your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled. T o ensure safe driving WARNING ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, this unit is not for use with a video screen that is visible to the driver . ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply , they must be obeyed. This unit detects whther your car îÂÂs parking brake is engaged or not, and prevents you from watching a DVD or TV on this display while driving. When you attempt to watch a DVD or TV , the warning VIDEO VIEWING IS NOT A V AILABLE WHILE DRIVING will appear on the screen. T o watch a DVD or TV on this display, park your car in a safe place and apply the parking brake. When using a display connected to REAR MONITOR OUT This unit î s REAR MONI TOR OUT is for con- nection of a display to enable passengers in the rear seats to watch the DVD or TV . WARNING NEVER install the display in a location that en- ables the driver to watch the DVD or TV while driving. T o avoid battery exhaustion Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using this unit. Using this unit without running the engine can result in batter y drainage. WARNING Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an ACC position. Precautions En 5 Section 01 Precautions
About this unit Playable discs DVD, Video CD and CD discs that display the logos shown below can be played back on this player . DVD video Video CD CD Note It is not possible to play back DVD audio disc. This player can only playback discs bearing the marks shown above. DVD video disc region numbers DVD video discs that have incompatible region numbers cannot be played on this player . The region number of the player can be found on the bottom of this unit. The illustration below shows the regions and corresponding region numbers. About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and op- eration. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanator y . This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit îÂÂs potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. W e recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and obser ve precautions on this page and in other sections. Precautions CA UTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES O THER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HAZARDOUS RADIA TION EXPOSURE. CA UTION: THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and precautio ns. ! Always keep the volume low enough so you can hear sounds outside of the car . ! P rotect this product from moisture. ! If the batter y is disconnected or dis- charged, the preset memor y will be erased and must be reprogrammed. ! If this unit does not operate properly , con- tact your dealer or nearest authorized P io - neer Ser vice Station. Before Y ou Start En 6 Section 02
Features T ouch panel key operation It is possible to operate this unit by using touch panel key . DVD video playback It is possible to play back DVD video, DVD -R (video mode) and DVD -RW (video mode). Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). CD playback Music CD/CD -R/CD-RW playback is possible. MP3 file playback It is possible to play back MP3 files recorded on CD -ROM/CD-R/CD -RW (ISO9660 Level 1/ Level 2 standard recordings). ! Supply of this product only conveys a li- cense for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broad- casting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other net- works or in other electronic content distri- bution systems, such as pay-audio or audio- on-demand applications. An inde- pendent license for such use is required. F or details, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com. NTSC/P AL compatibility This unit is NTSC/P AL system compatible. When connecting other components to this unit, be sure components are compatible with the same video system or else images will not be correctly reproduced. Dolby Digital/DTS compatibility When using this unit with a P ioneer multi- channel processor , you can enjoy the atmo - sphere and excitement provided by DVD movie and music software featuring 5.1channel re- cordings. ! Manufactured under license from Dolby La- boratories. îÂÂDolby î and the double-D sym- bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ! î DTSî is a registered trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Multi-aspect Switching between wide screen, letter box and panscan display is possible. Multi-audio Y ou can switch between multiple audio sys- tems recorded on a DVD as desired. Multi-subtitle Y ou can switch between multiple subtitle lan- guages recorded on a DVD as desired. Multi-angle Y ou can switch between multiple viewing an- gles of a scene recorded on a DVD as desired. Note This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual prop- erty rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Before Y ou Start En 7 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
T o protect the LCD screen ! Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the display when this unit is not being used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in LCD screen malfunction due to the resulting high temperatures. ! When using a portable phone, keep the an- tenna of the portable phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. For viewing LCD comfortably Due to its construction, the view angle of the LCD screen is limited. The viewing angle (verti- cal and horizontal) can be increased, however , by using BRIGHT to adjust the black density of the video. When using for the first time, adjust the black density in accordance with the view- ing angle (vertical and horizontal) to adjust for clear viewi ng. DIMMER can also be used to adjust the brightness of the LCD screen itself to suit your personal preference. Condition memory This function memorizes audio language, sub- title language, angle number and aspect ratio made during disc playback for up to 30 discs. Without any special operations, the final set- ting details during playback of a disc are mem- orized. The next time a disc is played, the previous settings are automatically applied. ! With some discs, audio language and sub- title language are automatically specified, in which case condition memor y does not function. ! When the number of discs exceeds 30, set- tings for the latest disc replace those for the least recent disc. What the marks on DVDs indicate The marks below may be found on DVD disc labels and packages. They indicate the type of images and audio recorded on the disc, and the functions you can use. Mark Meaning 2 Indicates the numbe r of audio sys- tems. 2 Indicates the numbe r of subtitle lan- guages. 3 Indicates the numbe r of viewing an- gles. 16 : 9 LB Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio: screen width-to-height ratio) type. 3 4 ALL Indicates the numbe r of the region where playback is possible. When an operation is prohibited When you are watching a DVD and attempt to per form an operation, it may not be per formed by the programming on the disc. When this happens, this unit indicates the icon on the screen. ! The icon may not appear in certain dis- cs. Resetting the micropr ocessor P ressing RESET lets you reset the micropro- cessor to its initial settings without changing the condition memor y . The microprocessor must be reset under the following conditions: ! P rior to using this unit for the first time after installation ! If the unit fails to operate properly Before Y ou Start En 8 Section 02
! When strange or incorrect messages ap- pear on the display 1 T ur n the ignition switch OFF . 2 Press RESET with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. RESET button Note After completing connections or when you want to erase all memorized settings or return the unit to its initial (factor y) settings, switch your engine ON or set the ignition switch to ACC ON before pressing RESET . Use and care of the r emote control Installing the battery Slide the tray out on the back of the remote control and insert the batter y with the plus ( ) and minus ( îÂÂ) poles pointing in the proper di- rection. ! When using for the first time, pull out the film protruding from the tray . WARNING Keep the batter y out of the reach of children. Should the batter y be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor . CAUTION ! Use only one CR2025 (3 V) lithium batter y . ! Remove the batter y if the remote control is not used for a month or longer . ! Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or dispose of the batter y in fire. ! Do not handle the batter y with metallic tools. ! Do not store the batter y with metallic materi- als. ! In the event of batter y leakage, wipe the re- mote control completely clean and install a new batter y . ! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or en- vironmental public institution îÂÂs rules that apply in your countr y/area. Before Y ou Start En 9 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Using the remote control P oint the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. ! The remote control may not function prop- erly in direct sunlight. Important ! Do not store the remote control in high tem- peratures or direct sunlight. ! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor , where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. Before Y ou Start En 10 Section 02
Head unit 1 DISPLA Y button P ress to select different displays. 2 PGM button P ress to operate the preprogrammed func- tions for each source. (Refer to Using the PGM button on page 81.) 3 Ambient light sensor Senses ambient light. This system automati- cally adjusts the brightness of the display to compensate for ambient light. 4 FLIP DOWN/CLOCK button P ress to turn the LCD panel horizontal tem- porarily when the LCD panel is upright. P ress to turn the clock display on or off when the LCD panel is closed. 5 OPEN/CLOSE button P ress to open or close the LCD panel. 6 ENTERT AINMENT button P ress to switch between the background displays. 7 WIDE button P ress to select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. 8 MENU button P ress and hold to display the picture adjust- ment menu. 9 RESET button P ress to return to the factor y settings (initial settings). a DET ACH button P ress to remove the front panel from the head unit. b EJECT button P ress to eject a disc from this unit. 1 2 4 5 3 6 7 a c d e f g h i l k 9 j 8 b What î s What En 11 Section 03 What î s What
c Joystick Move to do manual seek tuning, fast for- ward, reverse and track search controls. Also used for controlling functions. d EQ button P ress to select various equalizer cur ves. e BAND/ESC button P ress to select among three FM and one AM bands and cancel the control mode of functions. f ANGLE ( / î ) button P ress to change the LCD panel angle. g A TT button P ress to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. P ress once more to return to the original volume level. h BACK button P ress to return to the previous display . i REAR ON button P ress to watch a DVD/Video CD on a rear display if DVD (built-in DVD player) is not selected as the source. j Disc loading slot Insert a disc to play . k SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all of the available sources. l VOLUME Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. What î s What En 12 Section 03
Remote control 1 Remote control selection switch Switch to change the setting of the remote control. For details, refer to Setting remote control code type on page 73. 2 VOLUME button P ress to increase or decrease the volume. 3 REAR.S button P ress to watch a DVD/Video CD on a rear display if DVD (built-in DVD player) is not selected as the source. 4 SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all of the available sources. 5 Joystick Move to do manual seek tuning, fast for- ward, reverse and track search controls. Also used for controlling functions. 6 Remote control operation mode switch Switch the operation mode between AV H , DVD and TV modes. Normally, set to AV H . ! AV H î For common operation of this unit ! DVD î Only for DVD player operation ! TV î Only for TV tuner operation F or details, refer to Switching the r emote control operation mode switch on the next page. 7 BACK button P ress to return to the previous display . 8 BAND/ESC button P ress to select among three FM and one AM bands and cancel the control mode of functions. 9 ENTERT AINMENT button P ress to switch between the background displays. 5 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 a b d e c f g i k m o p h What î s What En 13 Section 03 What î s What
a FORW ARD ( n) button P ress to per form fast for ward playback. b STOP ( g ) button P ress to stop playback. c NEXT ( p ) button P ress to go to the next track (chapter). d CLEAR button P ress to cancel the input number while 0 î 10 are used. e 0 î 10 buttons P ress to directly select the desired track, preset tuning and disc. 1 îÂÂ6 buttons can op- erate the preset tuning for the tuner or disc number search for the multi-CD player . f PREVIOUS ( o ) button P ress to return to the previous track (chap- ter). g REVERSE ( m ) button P ress to per form fast reverse playback. h PLA Y/P AUSE ( f) button P ress to switch sequentially between play- back and pause play. i ANGLE button P ress to change the viewing angle during DVD playback. j STEP ( r /q ) button P ress to move ahead one frame at a time during DVD/VideoCD playback. Press and hold for one second to activate slow play- back. k SUBTITLE (SUB.T) button P ress to change the subtitle language dur- ing DVD playback. l DISPLA Y button P ress to select different displays. m AUDIO button P ress to change the audio language during DVD playback. n RETURN button P ress to display the PBC (playback control) menu during PBC playback. o MENU button P ress to display the DVD menu during DVD playback. p TOP MENU (TOP .M) button P ress to return to the top menu during DVD playback. Switching the remote control operation mode switch There are three remote control operation modes on the remote control. AV H mode operation When operating this unit by remote control, normally switch the mode to AV H . ! The joystick on the remote control can per- form the same operations as it on the head unit. F urthermore, the joystick can per form the same operations as the touch panel keys a , b , c and d . ! 1 îÂÂ6 can per form the same operations as the preset tuning keys P1 î P6 and the disc selection keys 01 îÂÂ06 . î If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12 by using 1 îÂÂ6, press and hold the corresponding numbers such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number appears in the display . What î s What En 14 Section 03
DVD mode operation If you switch the mode to DVD, the joystick and 0 î 10 operations are changed for DVD player . % When you want to operate the follow- ing functions, switch the mode to DVD: ! When operating the DVD menu by using the joystick. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 27.) ! When operating the PBC menu by using 0 î 10 . (Refer to Watching a Video CD on page 32.) ! When specifying title or track by using 0 î 10 . (Refer to Specifying title on page 30 and Specifying track on page 35.) Note When switching the mode to DVD, you cannot use these buttons; BACK , ENTERT AINMENT and DISPLA Y . TV mode operation If you use the rear output on TV tuner , you can watch the TV picture on the rear display inde- pendently . T o operate the TV on the rear dis- play independently, switch the mode to TV .I n this case, the joystick operation is changed for TV . ! F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner îÂÂs operation manuals. % When you want to operate the follow- ing functions only on the rear display , switch the mode to TV: ! When per forming manual or seek tuning by moving the joystick left or right. ! When recalling preset stations by moving the joystick up or down. ! When selecting the countr y group by click- ing joystick and then moving it left or right. (This function can be operated only when connecting a TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P6450TVP) featuring the countr y setting.) Note When switching the mode to TV, you cannot use except the joystick, SOURCE and VOLUME . What î s What En 15 Section 03 What î s What
T urning the unit on and selecting a source 1 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. Y ou can select a source you want to listen to. If DVD AUTO is turned on, load a disc in this unit to switch to DVD (refer to Switching the automatic disc playback on page 76). % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. The source names are displayed and select- able ones are highlighted. ! DVD î Built-in DVD player ! S-DVD î DVD player/multi-DVD player ! M-CD î Multi-CD player ! TUNER î T uner ! TV î T elevision ! AV î Video input ! EXT -1 î External unit 1 ! EXT -2 î External unit 2 ! AUX î AUX ! SOURCE OFF î T urn the unit off # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . % When using the button, press SOURCE to select a source. P ress SOURCE repeatedly to switch between the following sources: TUNER (tuner) î TV (television) î AV (video input) î DVD (built-in DVD player) î S-DVD (DVD player/multi-DVD player) î M-CD (multi- CD player) î EXT -1 (external unit 1) î EXT -2 (external unit 2) î AUX (AUX) Notes ! In the following cases, the sound source will not change: î When a unit corresponding to each source is not connected to this unit. î When no disc is set in this unit. î When no disc is set in the DVD player . î When no magazine is set in the multi-CD player . î When no magazine is set in the multi-DVD player . î When the AUX (auxiliar y input) is set to off (refer to page 75). î When the AV (video input) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 78). ! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions by this unit. T wo external units can be controlled by this unit. When two exter- nal units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this unit. ! When this unit î s blue/white lead is connected to the car îÂÂs auto-antenna relay control term- inal, the car îÂÂs antenna extends when this unit îÂÂs source is turned on. T o retract the an- tenna, turn the source off . Loading a disc % Insert a disc into the disc loading slot. Playback will automatically start. # If DVD AUTO is turned off , touch the source icon and then touch DVD to select DVD (refer to this page). Basic Operations En 16 Section 04
# When a disc is loaded in this unit, touch the source icon and then touch DVD to select DVD . # T o eject a disc, press EJECT . Notes ! The DVD player plays one, standard, 12-cm or 8-cm (single) disc at a time. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm discs. ! Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Discs which can be played back are listed on Playable discs on page 6. ! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play , check that the label side of the disc is up. P ress EJECT to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before inserting the disc again. ! If the DVD player does not operate properly , an error message such as ERROR-11 may be displayed. Refer to Err or messages on page 84. Adjusting the volume % Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. With the head unit, rotate VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. With the remote control, press VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. T urning the unit off % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch SOURCE OFF. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. % When using the button, press SOURCE and hold until the unit tur ns off. Using the rear display Y ou can watch a DVD/Video CD on the rear display regardless of whether DVD (built-in DVD player) is selected as the source or not. ! If you watch a DVD/Video CD on the rear display only, switch the operation mode on the remote control to DVD. And you can operate the DVD/Video CD playback on the rear display independently by the remote control. (Refer to page 14.) CAUTION When you have turned the DVD/Video CD play- back on by pressing REAR ON, you cannot turn it off even if you press SOURCE and hold. In this case, press REAR ON to turn the DVD/Video CD playback off . % Press REAR ON to watch a DVD/Video CD on the rear display when DVD (built-in DVD player) is not selected as the source. DVD/Video CD playback is turned on and the illumination color of REAR ON changes into the different color than the other buttons. # Y ou can also turn the DVD/Video CD playback on by pressing REAR.S on the remote contorol. # T o turn the DVD/Video CD playback off , press REAR ON again. Basic Operations En 17 Section 04 Basic Operations
T ouch panel key basic operation Activating the touch panel keys 1 1 T ouch panel keys T ouch to do various operations. 1 T ouch the screen to activate the touch panel keys corresponding to each source. The touch panel keys appear on the display. # T o go to the next group of touch panel keys, touch d . 2 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. # Y ou can also hide the touch panel keys by pressing BAND/ESC . Note If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 sec- onds, they will be hidden automatically . Operating the menu 1 4 5 2 3 1 FUNCTION key T ouch to select functions for each source. 2 AUDIO key T ouch to select various sound quality con- trols. 3 SETUP key T ouch to select various setup functions. 4 BACK key T ouch to return to the previous display. 5 ESC key T ouch to cancel the control mode of func- tions. 1 T ouch A.MENU to display MENU . MENU appears on the display . # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the desired key to display the function names you want to operate. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . 3 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. Basic Operations En 18 Section 04
Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Operating the menu by using the joystick Y ou can also per form most of the menu items by using the joystick. ! Switch the remote control operation mode to AV H to operate the menu by using the joystick on the remote contro l. (Refer to page 14.) 1 Click the joystick during display of each source to display MENU . MENU appears on the display . 2 Move the joystick up or down and then click it to display the function names you want to operate. # T o go to the next group of function names, move the joystick to NEXT and click it. # T o return to the previous group of function names, move the joystick to PREV and click it. 3 Press BAND/ESC to re turn to the display of each source. # Y ou can return to the previous display by pressing BACK . Opening and closing the LCD panel The LCD panel will be opened or closed auto- matically with the turning of the ignition switch on or off . Y ou can turn off the automatic close/open function. (Refer to page 79.) ! The automatic close/open function will op- erate the display as follows. î When the ignition switch is turned OFF while the LCD panel is opened, the LCD panel will close aft er six seconds. î When the ignition switch is turned ON again (or turned to ACC), the LCD panel will be opened automaticall y . î Removing or attaching the front panel will automatically close or open the LCD panel. (Refer to page 22.) ! When the ignition switch is turned OFF after the LCD panel has been closed, turn- ing the ignition switch ON again (or turning it to ACC) will not open the LCD panel. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE to open the LCD panel. ! When closing the LCD panel, check to make sure that it has closed completely . If the LCD panel has stopped halfwa y , leaving it like this could result in damage. % Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the LCD panel. # T o close the LCD panel, press OPEN/CLOSE again. Adjusting the LCD panel angle Important ! If you can hear the LCD panel knocking against your vehicle îÂÂs console or dashboard, press ANGLE ( î ) to move the LCD panel a lit- tle for ward. ! When adjusting the LCD panel angle, be sure to press ANGLE ( / î ). F orcibly adjusting the LCD panel by hand may damage it. % Press ANGLE ( / î ) to adjust the LCD panel to an easily viewable angle. The LCD panel angle continues changing as long as you press ANGLE ( / î ) and hold. Basic Operations En 19 Section 04 Basic Operations
# The adjusted the LCD panel angle will be memorized and automatically returned to the next time the LCD panel is opened. T ur ning the LCD pane l horizontal When the LCD panel is upright and it hinders the operation of the air conditioner , the posi- tion of the panel can be turned horizontal tem- porarily . % Press FLIP DOWN/CLOCK to turn the LCD panel horizontal. # T o return to original position, press FLIP DOWN /CLOCK again . # The LCD panel returns to the original position automatically with beep sounds 10 seconds af ter operation. Changing the wide screen mode Y ou can select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. % Press WIDE to select the desired set- ting. P ress WIDE repeatedly to switch between the following settings: FULL (full) î JUST (just) î CINEMA (cinema) î ZOOM (zoom)î NORMAL (normal) FULL (full) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direc- tion only , enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 TV picture (normal picture) without any omissions. JUST (just) The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and the amount of enlargement increases horizontally to the ends, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without sensing any disparity even on a wide screen. CINEMA (cinema) A picture is enlarged by the same proportion as FULL or ZOOM in the horizontal direction and by an intermediate proportion between FULL and ZOOM in the vertical direction; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture) where cap- tions lie outside. ZOOM (zoom) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion both vertically and horizontally ; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture). NORMAL (normal) A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no sense of disparity since its proportions are the same as that of the normal picture. Notes ! Different settings can be memorized for each video source. ! When video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original aspect ratio, it may appear differently . ! Remember that using the wide mode feature of this system for commercial or public view- ing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author îÂÂs rights protected by the Copy- right Law . ! Video will appear grainy when viewed in CINEMA or ZOOM mode. ! The backup camera picture is always FULL . Basic Operations En 20 Section 04
Adjusting the picture adjustment Y ou can adjust BRIGHT (brightness), CONTRAST (contrast), COLOR (color) and HUE (hue) for each source and back-up cam- era. ! The adjustments of BRIGHT and CONTRAST are stored separately for light ambient (daytime) and dark ambient (night- time). A sun or moon is displayed to the lef t of BRIGHT and CONTRAST, respec- tively , as the ambient light sensor deter- mines brightness or darkness. ! Y ou cannot adjust HUE for P AL video. ! Y ou cannot adjust COLOR and HUE for the audio source. 1 Press MENU on the head unit and hold to display PICTURE ADJUST . P ress MENU until PICTURE ADJUST appears in the display . # Y ou cannot use MENU on the remote control. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the function to be adjusted. The adjustment function names are displayed and adjustable ones are highlighted. ! BRIGHT î Adjust the black intensity ! CONTRAST î Adjust the contrast ! COLOR î Adjust the color saturation ! HUE î Adjust the tone of color (red is em- phasized or green is emphasized) ! DIMMER î Adjust the brightness of display ! BACK-CAMERA î Switch to the picture ad- justment display for the back-up camera ! SOURCE î Return to the picture adjustment display for each source # Y ou can adjust the picture adjustment for back-up camera only when B-CAMERA is turned on. (Refer to Setting for back-up camera on page 78.) # With some back-up camera, the picture ad- justment may not be able to use. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the selected item. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the level of selected item. 24 î îÂÂ24 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. 4 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Adjusting the dimmer The adjustment of DIMMER is stored sepa- rately for each ambient light; daytime, evening and nighttime. The brightness of LCD screen will be adjusted optimum level autom atically in accordance with the ambient light based on the setting values. 1 Press MENU on the head unit and hold to display PICTURE ADJUST . P ress MENU until PICTURE ADJUST appears in the display . 2 T ouch DIMMER. The ambient light level used as the standard for adjusting DIMMER appears above the level bar . ! Y ellow sun î Adjust the brightness for bright ambient light (daytime) ! Red sun î Adjust the brightness for in- termediate brightness (evening) ! Blue moon î Adjust the brightness for dark ambient light (nighttime) 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the brightness. Each time you touch c or d moves yellow to - wards the left or the right. The level indicates the brightness of the screen being adjusted. The farther yellow moves to the right, the brighter the screen. 4 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Basic Operations En 21 Section 04 Basic Operations
Note The icons indicating the current ambient bright- ness used for adjusting BRIGHT and CONTRAST may differ from DIMMER slightly . Protecting your unit fr om theft The front panel can be detached from the head unit to discourage theft. ! If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turni ng off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. ! Y ou can turn off the warning tone. See Switching the warning tone on page 75. Important ! Never use force or grip the display and the buttons tightly when removing or attaching. ! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks. ! Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. ! Attach the front panel while driving, or else may result in scratching or damage. Removing the front panel 1 Press DET ACH to remove the front panel. P ress DET ACH and the right side of the front panel is removed from the head unit. 2 Grip the right side of the front panel and pull it gently outward. T ake care not to grip it tightly or to drop it. Attaching the front panel % Replace the front panel by holding it upright to this unit and clipping it securely into the mounting hooks. Basic Operations En 22 Section 04
Listening to the radio 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 These are the basic steps necessar y to operate the radio. More advanced tuner operation is explained starting on the next page. Important If you are using this unit in North, Central or South America, reset the AM tuning step (see Setting the AM tuning step on page 74). 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to, AM or FM. 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected. 4 Frequency indicator Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned. 5 Preset list display Shows the preset list. 6 STEREO indicator Shows that the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo. 7 LOCAL indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch TUNER to select the tuner . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired band is displayed, FM1 , FM2, FM3 for FM or AM . 4 T o perform manual tuning, touch c or d shortly . The frequencies move up or down step by step. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by mov- ing the joystick left or right. 5 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by touching either c or d shortly . # If you keep touching c or d you can skip broadcasting stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys. # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by holding the joystick left or right. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 sec- onds, they will be hidden automatically . T uner En 23 Section 05 T uner
Introduction of advanced tuner operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the frequency display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the frequency display . Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1 î P6 you can easily store up to six broad- cast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a key . % When you find a fr equency that you want to store in memory keep touching a preset tuning key P 1 îÂÂP 6 until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have touched will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memor y . The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key P1 î P6 the radio station frequency is recalled from memor y . # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. # When P1 î P6 are not displayed, you can dis- play them by touching DISP . Notes ! Up to 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the three FM bands, and 6 AM stations can be stored in memor y . ! Y ou can also use a and b to recall radio sta- tion frequencies assigned to preset tuning keys P1 î P6 . ! Y ou can also per form the same operations using P . CH MEMO . T o display P . CH MEMO , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . T uning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch LOCAL. 2 T ouch a to turn local seek tuning on. # T o turn local seek tuning off , touch b . T uner En 24 Section 05
3 T ouch c or d to set the sensitivity . There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for AM: FM: 1 î 2 î 3 î 4 AM: 1 î 2 The 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memor y) lets you automa- tically store the six strongest broadcast fre- quencies under preset tuning keys P1 î P6 and once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a key . 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch BSM. 2 T ouch a to turn BSM on. BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 î P6 in order of their signal strength. When finished, BSM stops flashing. # T o cancel the storage process, touch b . Note Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may re- place broadcast frequencies you have saved using P1 î P6 . T uner En 25 Section 05 T uner
W atching a DVD video 1 3 4 5 6 2 7 8 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a DVD video with your DVD player . More ad- vanced DVD video operation is explained start- ing on page 28. 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 DVD-V indicator Shows when a DVD video is playing. 3 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing. 4 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent chapter . 6 Viewing angle indicator Shows what viewing angle has been se- lected. 7 Subtitle language indicator Shows what subtitle language has been se- lected. 8 Audio language indicator Shows what audio language has been se- lected. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # If no disc is loaded in this unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in this unit. (Refer to page 16.) # With some discs, a menu may be displayed. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on the next page.) 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another chapter , touch o or p . T ouching p skips to the start of the next chapter . T ouching o once skips to the start of the current chapter . T ouching again will skip to the previous chapter . Chapter numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another chapter by moving the joystick left or right. 4 T ouch d to display m and n . T ouch d until m and n appear in the dis- play . 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching m or n . If you keep touching m or n for five sec- onds, the icon m or n changes into rever- sal indication. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you re- lease m or n. T o resume playback at a de- sired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by holding the joystick left or right. Playing DVD video discs En 26 Section 06
# F ast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Notes ! Y ou can display the repeat range selected cur- rently by touching DISP . ! If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Operating the DVD menu Some DVDs allow you to select the disc con- tents using a menu. ! Y ou can display the menu by touching MENU or TOP .M while a disc is playing. T ouching either of these keys again lets you start playback from the location selected from the menu. For details, refer to the in- structions provided with the disc. 1 T ouch î î î to display touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu. # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. 2 T ouch a , b , c or d to select the desired menu item. 3 T ouch ENTER. Playback starts from the selected menu item. # If you switch the remote control operation mode to DVD, the joystick on the remote control can also operate the DVD menu. (Refer to page 14.) # Y ou cannot operate the DVD menu by the joy- stick on the head unit. # The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. Skipping back or forward to another title % T o skip back or forward to another title, touch a or b . T ouching a skips to the start of the next title. T ouching b skips to the start of the previous title. Title numbers are displayed for eight seconds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another title by moving the joystick up or down. Stopping playback % T ouch g . # When you stop DVD playback by touching g , that location on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Playing DVD video discs En 27 Section 06 Playing DVD video discs
Introduction of advanced DVD video operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play There are two repeat play ranges for the DVD playback: TITILE (title repeat) and CHAPTER (chapter repeat). 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch REPEA T. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the repeat range. ! TITILE î Repeat just the current title ! CHAPTER î Repeat just the current chapter ! REPEA T OFF î Play throughout the current disc Note If you per form chapter search or fast for ward/re- verse, the repeat play range changes to REPEA T OFF . Pausing DVD video playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f during playback. The icon e is displayed for four seconds and playback is paused letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Notes ! Y ou can also turn on or off pause function using P AUSE . T o display P AUSE , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed indicating that still playback is not possi- ble. Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. Playing DVD video discs En 28 Section 06
% T ouch r during playback. Each time you touch r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . Notes ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Keep touching r until î î is displayed during playback. The icon î î is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . 2 Press q or r to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you press q or r changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 î 1/8 î 1/4 î 1/2 Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi- ble. Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time Y ou can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a title or chapter , and the time search function to specify the time on a disc at which play starts. ! Chapter search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH and then touch TITLE (title), CHAP . (chapter) or TIME (time). 2 T ouch 0 îÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . For titles and chapters ! T o select 3, touch 3 . ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order . For time (time search) ! T o select 21 minutes 43 seconds, touch 2 , 1 , 4 and 3 in order . ! T o select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7 , 1 , 0 and 0 in order . # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C . # Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . 3 While the input number is displayed, touch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected scene. Notes ! Y ou can also per form the same operations using SEARCH. T o display SEARCH , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . ! With discs featuring a menu, you can also touch MENU or TOP .M and then make selec- tions from the displayed menu. Playing DVD video discs En 29 Section 06 Playing DVD video discs
! With some discs, the icon may be dis- played, indicating that titles, chapters and time cannot be specified. Specifying title Y ou can use the direct search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a title. ! Only the remote control can operate this function. T o per form this function, switch the remote control operation mode to DVD . (Refer to page 14.) % Press 0 î 10 corre sponding to a desired title number when the disc is stopped. Title number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected title. ! T o select 3, press 3 . ! T o select 10, press 10 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, press 10 , 10 and 3 in order . Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) DVDs can provide audio playback with differ- ent languages and different systems (Dolby Di- gital, DTS etc.). With DVDs featuring multi- audio recordings, you can switch between lan- guages/audio systems during playback. % T ouch AUDIO during playback. Each time you touch AUDIO switches be- tween audio. Notes ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD îÂÂs pack- age indicates the number of recorded lan- guages/audio systems. ! With some DVDs, switching between lan- guages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using DVD SETUP. For details, refer to Setting the audio language on page 71. ! Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If this unit îÂÂs optical digital outputs are not con- nected, DTS audio will not be output, so select an audio setting other than DTS. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated. ! T ouching AUDIO during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. % T ouch SUB.T during playback. Each time you touch SUB.T switches between subtitle language. Notes ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD îÂÂs pack- age indicates the number of recorded subtitle languages. ! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using DVD SETUP . F or details, refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 70. ! T ouching SUB.T during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Playing DVD video discs En 30 Section 06
Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch among viewing angles during play- back. ! During playback of a scene shot from mul- tiple angles on this unit, the angle icon is displayed. T urn angle icon display on or off using DVD SETUP. For details, refer to Setting angle icon display on page 72. % T ouch ANGLE during playback of a scene shot from multiple angles. Each time you touch ANGLE switches be- tween angle. Notes ! The 3 mark on a DVD îÂÂs package indicates it features multi-angle scenes. The number in the 3 mark indicates the number of angles from which scenes were shot. ! T ouching ANGLE during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Playing DVD video discs En 31 Section 06 Playing DVD video discs
W atching a Video CD 1 3 4 2 5 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a Video CD with your DVD player . More ad- vanced Video CD operation is explained start- ing on the next page. 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 V -CD indicator Shows when a Video CD is playing. 3 T rack number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 5 Audio output indicator Shows the output channel selected cur- rently . 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # If no disc is loaded in this unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in this unit. (Refer to page 16.) # With a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function, a menu is displayed. 2 Switch the remote control operation mode to DVD and then press 0 îÂÂ10 to select the desir ed menu item. Playback starts from the selected menu item. # When the menu is two or more pages long, touch o or p to switch between displays. # Y ou can play a disc without using a menu (without PBC playback). (Refer to Sear ching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time on page 35.) T o return to PBC playback, stop playback and touch f . # Y ou can display the menu by pressing RETURN during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. # After operating the menu, we recommend that you switch remote control operation mode to AV H . (Refer to page 14.) 3 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 4 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p . T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching again will skip to the previous track. T rack numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick left or right. # During PBC playback, a menu may be dis- played if you per form these operations. 5 T ouch d to display m and n . T ouch d until m and n appear in the dis- play . 6 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching m or n . If you keep touching m or n for five sec- onds, the icon m or n changes into rever- Playing Video CDs En 32 Section 07
sal indication. When this happens, fast re- verse/fast for ward continues even if you re- lease m or n. T o resume playback at a desired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by holding the joystick left or right. # F ast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 sec- onds, they will be hidden automatically . Stopping playback % T ouch g . # When you stop Video CD playback (during PBC playback only) by touching g, that location on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Introduction of advanced Video CD operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play There are two repeat play ranges for the Video CD playback: TRACK (track repeat) and DISC (disc repeat). Playing Video CDs En 33 Section 07 Playing Video CDs
! During PBC playback of Video CDs, this function cannot be operated. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch REPEA T. 2 T ouch either of the following touch panel keys to select the repeat range. ! TRACK î Repeat just the current track ! DISC î Repeat the current disc Note If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, the repeat play range changes to DISC . Pausing Video CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f during playback. The icon e is displayed for four seconds and playback is paused letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Notes ! Y ou can also turn on or off pause function using P AUSE . T o display P AUSE , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed indicating that still playback is not possi- ble. Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % T ouch r during playback. Each time you touch r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . Notes ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Keep touching r until î î is displayed during playback. The icon î î is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . 2 Press q or r to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you press q or r changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 î 1/8 î 1/4 î 1/2 Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi- ble. Playing Video CDs En 34 Section 07
Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time Y ou can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a track, and the time search function to specify the time on a disc at which play starts. ! During PBC playback of Video CDs, this function cannot be operated. ! Time search is not possible when disc play- back has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH and then touch TRACK (track) or TIME (time). 2 T ouch 0 îÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . For tracks ! T o select 3, touch 3 . ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order . For time (time search) ! T o select 21 minutes 43 seconds, touch 2 , 1 , 4 and 3 in order . ! T o select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7 , 1 , 0 and 0 in order . # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C . # Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . 3 While the input number is displayed, touch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected scene. Note Y ou can also per form the same operations using SEARCH . T o display SEARCH , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . Specifying track Y ou can use the direct search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a track. ! Only the remote control can operate this function. T o per form this function, switch the remote control operation mode to DVD . (Refer to page 14.) ! During PBC playback of Video CDs, this function cannot be operated. % Press 0 î 10 corre sponding to a desired track number when the disc is stopped. T rack number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected track. ! T o select 3, press 3 . ! T o select 10, press 10 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, press 10 , 10 and 3 in order . Note With some discs, the icon may be displayed and operation may not be possible. Selecting audio output Y ou can switch between stereo and monaural audio output. % Press AUDIO during playback. P ress AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following outputs: L R (left and right channels) î L (left channel) î R (right channel) Note Y ou can also per form the same operations using L/R SELECT . T o display L/R SELECT , touch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NEXT . Playing Video CDs En 35 Section 07 Playing Video CDs
Listening a CD 1 3 4 2 6 5 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your DVD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 CD indicator Shows when a CD is playing. 3 T rack number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 5 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing disc. 6 Repeat indicator Shows the selected repeat range. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # If no disc is loaded in this unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in this unit. (Refer to page 16.) 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p . T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching again will skip to the previous track. T rack numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick left or right. 4 T ouch d to display m and n . T ouch d until m and n appear in the dis- play . 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching m or n . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by holding the joystick left or right. Notes ! When playing discs with MP3 files and audio data (CD -DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED- MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA by touching DA÷MP3 or pressing BAND/ESC . ! If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Stopping playback % T ouch g . # When you stop CD playback by touching g , that location on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Playing CDs En 36 Section 08
Introduction of advanced CD operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch REPEA T. 2 T ouch either of the following touch panel keys to select the repeat range. ! TRACK î Repeat just the current track ! DISC î Repeat the current disc Notes ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. ! When playing discs with MP3 files and audio data (CD -DA), repeat play per forms within the currently playing data type even if DISC is selected. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order . 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch RANDOM. 2 T ouch a to turn random play on. T racks will play in a random order . # T o turn random play off , touch b . Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch SCAN. 2 T ouch a to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 3 When you find the desir ed track touch b to turn scan play off. Playing CDs En 37 Section 08 Playing CDs
Note After scanning of a CD is finished, normal play- back of the tracks will begin again. Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f during playback. The icon e is displayed for four seconds and playback is paused. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Note Y ou can also turn on or off pause function using P AUSE . T o display P AUSE , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . Searching for a desired track Y ou can use the search function to specify a track to search for a desired track. 1 T ouch SEARCH and then touch TRACK. 2 T ouch 0 îÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . ! T o select 3, touch 3 . ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order . # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C . # Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . 3 While the input number is displayed, touch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected track. Note Y ou can also per form the same operations using SEARCH . T o display SEARCH , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . Entering disc titles Y ou can input CD titles and display the title. The next time you insert a CD for which you have entered a title, the title of that CD will be displayed. Disc title input lets you input CD titles up to 10 letters long and up to 48 disc titles into this unit. ! When playing a CD TEXT disc, you cannot switch to TITLE EDIT . The disc title will have already been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. ! If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, NO TITLE is displayed. 1 Play a CD that you want to enter the title. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NEXT. 3 T ouch TITLE EDIT. 4 T ouch ABC to select the desired charac- ter type. T ouch ABC repeatedly to switch between the following character type: Alphabet (upper case), numbers and symbols î Alphabet (lower case) # Y ou can select to input numbers and symbols by touching 123 . 5 T ouch a or b to select a letter of the al- phabet. Each time you touch a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C ... X Y Z , numbers and symbols in 1 2 3 ... | } ï order . Each time you Playing CDs En 38 Section 08
touch b will display a letter in the reverse order , such as Z Y X ... C B A order . 6 T ouch d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the desired letter is displayed, touch d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . T ouch c to move backwards in the display. 7 T ouch OK to store the entered title in memory . 8 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . Notes ! Titles remain in memor y , even af ter the disc has been removed from this unit, and are re- called when the disc is reinserted. ! After data for 48 discs has been stored in memor y , data for a new disc will over write the oldest one. Using CD TEXT functions Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist îÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these spe- cially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below . Displaying titles on CD TEXT dis cs % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: DiscTitle (disc title) î DiscArtist (disc artist name) î T rackTitle (track title) î T .Artist (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO ART IST ). Scrolling titles in the display This unit can display the first 19 letters only of DiscTitle , DiscArtist , T rackTitle and T .Artist . When the recorded information is longer than 19 letters, you can scroll the text to the lef t so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Keep touching DISP until the title be- gins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the display . Selecting tracks from the track title list T rack title list lets you see the list of track titles on a CD TEXT disc and select one of them to playback. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch TRACK LIST. 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT to switch between the lists of titles. 3 T ouch your favorite track title. That selection will begin to play . Playing CDs En 39 Section 08 Playing CDs
Listening MP3 1 4 5 2 7 3 6 These are the basic steps necessar y to play an MP3 with your DVD player . More advanced MP3 operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 MP3 indicator Shows when the MP3 file is playing. 3 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. 4 T rack number indicator Shows the track (file) currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track (file). 6 Folder name indicator Shows the folder name currently playing. 7 Repeat indicator Shows the selected repeat range. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # If no disc is loaded in this unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in this unit. (Refer to page 16.) 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p . T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching again will skip to the previous track. T rack numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick left or right. 4 T ouch d to display a , b , m and n . T ouch d until a, b, m and n appear in the display . 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching m or n . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by holding the joystick left or right. # There is no sound on fast for ward or reverse. # This is fast for ward and reverse operation only for the file being played. This operation is can- celed when the previous or next file is reached. 6 T ouch a or b to select a folder . # Y ou can also select a folder by moving the joy- stick up or down. # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND/ESC . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have an MP3 file recorded in it. Playing MP3 En 40 Section 09
Notes ! When playing discs with MP3 files and audio data (CD -DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED- MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA by touching DA÷MP3 or pressing BAND/ESC . ! If you have switched between playback of MP3 files and audio data (CD -DA), playback starts at the first track on the disc. ! This DVD player can play back an MP3 file re- corded on CD-ROM. (Refer to page 86 for files that can be played back.) ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up playback and the sound being issued. This is particularly the case when playing back multi-session and many folders. When being read in, FORMA T READ is displayed. ! Playback is carried out in order of file number . F olders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast for ward or reverse operations are used. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Stopping playback % T ouch g . # When you stop MP3 playback by touching g , that location on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Introduction of advanced MP3 operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play F or MP3 playback, there are three repeat play ranges: FOLDER (folder repeat), TRACK (one- track repeat) and DISC (repeat all tracks). Playing MP3 En 41 Section 09 Playing MP3
1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch REPEA T. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the repeat range. ! FOLDER î Repeat the current folder ! TRACK î Repeat just the current track ! DISC î Repeat all tracks Notes ! If you select other folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRACK, the repeat play range changes to FOLDER . ! When FOLDER is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . ! When playing discs with MP3 files and audio data (CD -DA), repeat play per forms within the currently playing data type even if DISC is selected. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, FOLDER and DISC . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch RANDOM. 3 T ouch a to turn random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected FOLDER or DISC ranges. # T o turn random play off , touch b . Scanning folders and tracks While you are using FOLDER, the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using DISC , the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch SCAN. 3 T ouch a to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur- rent folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. 4 When you find the desir ed track (or folder) touch b to turn scan play off. Note After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Pausing MP3 playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f during playback. The icon e is displayed for four seconds and playback is paused. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Note Y ou can also turn on or off pause function using P AUSE . T o display P AUSE , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . Playing MP3 En 42 Section 09
Searching for a desired track in the current folder Y ou can use the search function to specify a track to search for a desired track. ! T rack search is not possible when disc play- back has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH and then touch TRACK. 2 T ouch 0 îÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . ! T o select 3, touch 3 . ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order . # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C . # Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . 3 While the input number is displayed, touch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected track. Note Y ou can also per form the same operations using SEARCH . T o display SEARCH , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . Displaying text information on MP3 disc T ext information recorded on a MP3 disc can be displayed. % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Folder (folder name) î File (file name) î T rackTitle (track title) î Artist (artist name) î Album (album title) î Comment (comment) î BitRate (bit rate) # When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the bit rate value is not dis- played even after switching to bit rate. ( VBR will be displayed.) # If specific information has not been recorded on a MP3 disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO NAME ). Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 19 letters only of Folder , File, T rackTitle , Artist , Album and Comment . When the recorded information is longer than 19 letters, you can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the text informa- tion can be seen. % Keep touching DISP until the text infor - mation begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the text informatio n will appear in the display . Selecting folders from the folder name list F older name list lets you see the list of folder names on an MP3 disc and select one of them to playback. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch FOLDER LIS. 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT to switch between the lists of names. 3 T ouch your favorite folder name. That selection will begin to play . Playing MP3 En 43 Section 09 Playing MP3
Listening a CD 1 3 4 2 5 Y ou can use this unit to control a multi- CD player , which is sold separately . These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your multi- CD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 Disc number indicator Shows the disc currently playing. 3 T rack number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 5 Disc list display Shows the disc title list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch M-CD to select the multi-CD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch any of 01 îÂÂ06 to select a disc you want to listen to. If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12, touch PREV or NEXT to display 07 î 12 . # When 01 î 06 and 07î 12 are not displayed, you can display them by touching DISP . # Y ou can also sequentially select a disc by using a /b . 4 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch c or d . T ouching d skips to the start of the next track. T ouching c once skips to the start of the cur- rent track. T ouching again will skip to the pre- vious track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick left or right. 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching c or d . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by holding the joystick left or right. Notes ! When the multi-CD player per forms the pre- parator y operations, READY is displayed. ! If the multi-CD player does not operate prop- erly , an error message such as ERROR-11 may be displayed. Refer to the multi-CD player owner îÂÂs manual. ! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player ma- gazine, NO DISC is displayed. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . 50-disc multi-CD player Only those functions described in this manual are supported for 50-disc multi-CD players. Multi-CD Player En 44 Section 10
Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the multi-CD player: M-CD (multi-CD player re- peat), TRACK (one-track repeat) and DISC (disc repeat). 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch REPEA T. 2 T ouch j to select the repeat range. T ouch j repeatedly until the desired repeat range appears in the display . ! M-CD î Repeat all discs in the multi-CD player ! TRACK î Repeat just the current track ! DISC î Repeat the current disc # Y ou can also select the repeat range by mov- ing the joystick left or right. Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to M-CD . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRACK, the repeat play range changes to DISC . Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, M-CD and DISC . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch RANDOM. 3 T ouch a to turn random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected M-CD or DISC ranges. # T o turn random play off , touch b . Multi-CD Player En 45 Section 10 Multi-CD Player
Scanning CDs and tracks While you are using DISC, the beginning of each track on the selected disc plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using M-CD, the beginning of the first track of each disc is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch SCAN. 3 T ouch a to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur- rent disc (or the first track of each disc) is played. 4 When you find the desir ed track (or disc) touch b to turn scan play off. Note After track or disc scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch P AUSE. 2 T ouch a to turn pause on. Play of the current track pauses. # T o turn pause off , touch b . Using ITS playlists ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a playlist of favorite tracks from those in the multi-CD player magazine. After you have added your favorite tracks to the playlist you can turn on ITS play and play just those selec- tions. Creating a playlist with ITS programming Y ou can use ITS to enter and playback up to 99 tracks per disc, up to 100 discs (with the disc title). (With multi- CD players sold before the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, up to 24 tracks can be stored in the playlist.) 1 Play a CD that you want to pro gram. T ouch a or b to select a CD. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NEXT. 3 T ouch ITS MEMORY. 4 T ouch c or d to select a desired track. 5 T ouch a to store the currently playing track in the playlist. MEMOR Y is displayed briefly and the cur- rently playing selection is added to your play- list. The display then shows track number again. Note After data for 100 discs has been stored in mem- or y , data for a new disc will over write the oldest one. Playback from your ITS playlist ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into your ITS playlist. When you turn on ITS play, tracks from your ITS playlist in the multi-CD player will begin to play . Multi-CD Player En 46 Section 10
1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on page 45. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NEXT. 3 T ouch ITS PLA Y. 4 T ouch a to turn ITS play on. Playback begins of those tracks from your playlist within the previously selected M-CD or DISC ranges. # If no tracks in the current range are pro- grammed for ITS play then ITS EMPTY is dis- played. # T o turn ITS play off , touch b . Erasing a track from your ITS playlist When you want to delete a track from your ITS playlist, you can if ITS play is on. If ITS play is already on, skip to step 2. 1 Play a CD you want to delete a track from your ITS playlist, and turn ITS play on. Refer to Playback from your ITS playlist on the previous page. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NEXT. 3 T ouch ITS MEMORY. 4 T ouch c or d to select a desired track. 5 T ouch b to erase a track from your ITS playlist. The currently playing selection is erased from your ITS playlist and playback of the next track from your ITS playlist begins. # If there are no tracks from your playlist in the current range, ITS EMPTY is displayed and nor- mal play resumes. Erasing a CD from your ITS playlist When you want to delete all tracks of a CD from your ITS playlist, you can if ITS play is off . 1 Play a CD that you want to delete. T ouch a or b to select a CD. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NEXT. 3 T ouch ITS MEMORY. 4 T ouch b to erase all tracks on the cur - rently playing CD from your ITS playlist. All tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from your playlist and ALL CLEAR is displayed. Using disc title functions Y ou can input CD titles and display the title. Then you can easily search for and select a de- sired disc for play. Entering disc titles Disc title input lets you input CD titles up to 10 letters long and up to 100 disc titles (with ITS playlist) into the multi- CD player . ! When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi- CD player , you cannot switch to TITLE EDIT . The disc title will have already been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. 1 Play a CD that you want to enter the title. T ouch a or b to select a CD. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NEXT. Multi-CD Player En 47 Section 10 Multi-CD Player
3 T ouch TITLE EDIT. 4 T ouch ABC to select the desired charac- ter type. T ouch ABC repeatedly to switch between the following character type: Alphabet (upper case), numbers and symbols î Alphabet (lower case) # Y ou can select to input numbers and symbols by touching 123 . 5 T ouch a or b to select a letter of the al- phabet. Each time you touch a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C ... X Y Z , numbers and symbols in 1 2 3 ... | } ï order . Each time you touch b will display a letter in the reverse order , such as Z Y X ... C B A order . 6 T ouch d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the desired letter is displayed, touch d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . T ouch c to move backwards in the display. 7 T ouch OK to store the entered title in memory . 8 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . Notes ! Titles remain in memor y , even af ter the disc has been removed from the magazine, and are recalled when the disc is reinserted. ! After data for 100 discs has been stored in memor y , data for a new disc will over write the oldest one. Displaying disc titles Y ou can display the title of any disc that has had a disc title entered. % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: DISC LIST (disc list) î DiscTitle (disc title) When you select DiscTitle , the title of the cur- rently playing disc is shown in the display. # If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, NO TITLE is displayed. Using CD TEXT functions Y ou can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player . Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist îÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these spe- cially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below . Displaying titles on CD TEXT dis cs % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: DISC LIST (disc list) î DiscTitle (disc title) î DiscArtist (disc artist name)î T rackTitle (track title) î T .Artist (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO ART IST ). Multi-CD Player En 48 Section 10
Scrolling titles in the display This unit can display the first 19 letters only of DiscTitle , DiscArtist , T rackTitle and T .Artist . When the recorded information is longer than 19 letters, you can scroll the text to the lef t so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Keep touching DISP until the title be- gins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the display . Selecting tracks from the track title list T rack title list lets you see the list of track titles on a CD TEXT disc and select one of them to playback. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch TRACK LIST. 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT to switch between the lists of titles. 3 T ouch your favorite track title. That selection will begin to play . Using compr ession and bass emphasis Y ou can use these functions only with a multi- CD player that supports them. Using COMP (compression) and DBE (dy- namic bass emphasis) functions let you adjust the sound playback quality of the multi- CD player . Each of the functions have a two-st ep adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and softer sounds at higher volumes. DBE boosts bass levels to give play- back a fuller sound. Listen to each of the ef- fects as you select through them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch COMP. # If the multi-CD player does not support COMP/DBE, NO COMP is displayed when you at- tempt to select it. 2 T ouch j to select your favorite set- ting. T ouch j repeatedly to switch between the following settings: COMP OFF î COMP 1 î COMP 2 î COMP OFF î DBE 1 î DBE 2 # Y ou can also select the desired setting by mov- ing the joystick left or right. Multi-CD Player En 49 Section 10 Multi-CD Player
W atching the TV tuner 1 3 4 2 5 Y ou can use this unit to control a TV tuner , which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner îÂÂs operation manuals. This section provides information on TV operations with this unit which differs from that described in the TV tuner îÂÂs operation manual. 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 Band indicator Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to. 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected. 4 Channel indicator Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned. 5 Preset list display Shows the preset list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch TV to select the TV . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired band is displayed, TV1 or TV2 . 4 T o perform manual tuning, touch c or d shortly . The channels move up or down step by step. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by mov- ing the joystick left or right. 5 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the channels until a broad- cast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by touching either c or d shortly . # If you keep touching c or d you can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys. # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by holding the joystick left or right. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 sec- onds, they will be hidden automatically . TV tuner En 50 Section 11
Introduction of advanced TV tuner operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the TV picture, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the TV picture. Storing and recalling broadcast stations If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P01 îÂÂP12 you can easily store up to 12 broad- cast stations for later recall with the touch of a key . % When you find a station that you want to store in memory keep touching a prese t tuning key P01 îÂÂP12 until the preset num- ber stops flashing. The number you have touched will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected station has been stored in mem- or y . The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key P01 îÂÂP12 the station is recalled from memor y . # T o switch between P01 îÂÂP06 and P07 îÂÂP12 , touch PREV or NEXT . # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. # When P01 î P06 and P07î P12 are not dis- played, you can display them by touching DISP . Notes ! Up to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TV bands can be stored in memor y . ! Y ou can also use a and b to recall stations assigned to preset tuning keys P01 îÂÂP12 . ! Y ou can also per form the same operations using P . CH MEMO . T o display P . CH MEMO , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch BSSM. 2 T ouch a to turn BSSM on. BSSM begins to flash. While BSSM is flashing the 12 strongest broadcast stations will be stored in order from the lowest channel up. When finished, BSSM disappears. # T o cancel the storage process, touch b . TV tuner En 51 Section 11 TV tuner
Note Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may re- place broadcast stations you have saved using P01 îÂÂP12 . Selecting the country group ! This function can be operated only when connecting a TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P6450TVP) featuring the countr y setting. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch COUNTR Y. 2 T ouch c or d to select the country group. T ouch c or d until the desired countr y group appears in the display . COUNTR Y 1 (CCIR channel) î COUNTRY 2 (IN channel) î COUNTRY 3 (CHN channel) î COUNTR Y 4 (U.K. channel) î COUNTRY 5 (OIRT channel) î COUNTRY 6 (AUSTRALIA channel) TV tuner En 52 Section 11
Playing a disc 1 3 5 6 2 4 Y ou can use this unit to control a DVD player or multi-DVD player , which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the DVD player îÂÂs or multi-DVD player îÂÂs operation manuals. This section provides information on DVD operations with this unit which differs from that described in the DVD player î so r multi-DVD player îÂÂs operation manual. ! Switch the remote control selection to sui- table setting to operate DVD players. (Refer to page 73.) ! Switch the remote control operation mode to DVD to operate the DVD player by using remote control. (Refer to page 14.) 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 Disc type indicator Shows the type of the currently playing disc. 3 Disc number indicator Shows the disc currently playing when using a multi-DVD player . 4 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing during DVD video playback. 5 Chapter/track number indicator Shows the chapter/track currently playing. 6 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent chapter/track. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch S-DVD to select the DVD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another chapter/track, touch c or d shortly . # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another chapter/track by moving the joystick left or right. When using the joystick on the remote control, switch the remote control operation mode to AV H . (Refer to page 14.) 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by holding the joystick left or right. When using the joystick on the remote control, switch the remote control operation mode to AV H . (Refer to page 14.) Note If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 sec- onds, they will be hidden automatically . T urning the DVD player on or off ! Only the remote control can operate this function. T o per form this function, switch the remote control operation mode to DVD . (Refer to page 14.) DVD Player En 53 Section 12 DVD Player
% Press REAR.S to turn the DVD player on. # T o turn the DVD player off , press REAR.S again. Selecting a disc ! Only when a multi-DVD player is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. % T ouch a or b to select a disc. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another disc by moving the joystick up or down. When using the joystick on the remote control, switch the remote control operation mode to AV H . (Refer to page 14.) # Y ou can also select a disc by pressing BACK or ENTERT AINMENT on the remote control when the remote control operation mode is switched to DVD . Introduction of advanced DVD player operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play ! During PBC playback of Video CDs, this function cannot be operated. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch REPEA T. DVD Player En 54 Section 12
2 T ouch c or d to select the re peat range. During DVD video playback ! TITILE î Repeat just the current title ! CHAPTER î Repeat just the current chapter ! DISC î Repeat the current disc During Video CD or CD playback ! TRACK î Repeat just the current track ! DISC î Repeat the current disc Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRACK, the repeat play range changes to DISC . Pausing disc playback 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch P AUSE. 2 T ouch a to turn pause on. # T o turn pause off , touch b . Playing tracks in a random order ! Y ou can operate this function only during CD playback. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch RANDOM. 2 T ouch a to turn random play on. T racks will play in a random order . # T o turn random play off , touch b . Scanning tracks of a CD ! Y ou can operate this function only during CD playback. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch SCAN. 2 T ouch a to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 3 When you find the desir ed track touch b to turn scan play off. Using ITS playlists ! Only when a multi-DVD player is connected to this unit, you can operate these func- tions. ! This function differs slightly from ITS play- back with a multi- CD player . With multi- DVD player , ITS playback applies only to the CD playing. F or details, refer to Using ITS playlists on page 46. DVD Player En 55 Section 12 DVD Player
Introduction of audio adjustments 1 1 Audio display Shows the audio function names. Important If the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P7050) is connected to this unit, the audio function will be changed into the multi-channel processor î s audio menu. F or details, refer to Introduction of DSP adjustments on page 62. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch AUDIO to display the audio function names. The audio function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # If EQ-EX function has been selected and only when EQ-EX is turned on and CUSTOM is se- lected as the equalizer cur ve, you can switch to BASS and TREBLE . # Only when the subwoofer controller setting is PREOUT FULL , NON F ADING will be displayed instead of SUB WOOFER . (Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 75.) # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the audio function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the source display. Using balance adjustment Y ou can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch F AD/BAL. # When the rear output setting is REAR SP SUB. W , BALANCE will be displayed in- stead of FAD/BAL . Refer to Setting the r ear output and subwoofer controller on page 75. 2 T ouch a or b to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each time you touch a or b moves the front/ rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FRONT :15 î REAR:15 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FR:00 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. # When the rear output setting is REAR SP SUB. W , you cannot adjust front/rear speaker balance. Refer to Setting the r ear output and subwoofer controller on page 75. Audio Adjustments En 56 Section 13
3 T ouch c or d to adjust left/right speak- er balance. Each time you touch c or d moves the lef t/ right speaker balance towards the left or the right. LEFT :09 î RIGHT :09 is displayed as the left/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are six stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves: Display Equalizer curve SUPER BASS Super bass POWERFUL P ower ful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal CUSTOM Custom FLA T Flat ! CUSTOM is an adjusted equalizer cur ve that you create. ! A separate CUSTOM curve can be created for each source. If you make adjustments, the equalizer cur ve settings will be memor- ized in CUSTOM . ! When FLA T is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. % Press EQ to select the equalizer . P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: SUPER BASS î POWERFUL î NA TURAL î VOCAL î CUSTOM î FLA T Adjusting equalizer curves Y ou can adjust the currently selected equalizer cur ve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer cur ve settings are memorized in CUSTOM . ! Y ou can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (cur ve characteristics) of each currently selec ted cur ve band ( LOW / MID/ HIGH ). Level (dB) Center frequency Q=2N Q=2W F requency (Hz) 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch EQ MENU. 2 T ouch a or b to select the desired item. Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: BAND (bands) î LEVEL (equalizer level) î FREQUENCY (center frequency) î Q. F ACTOR (Q factor) 3 T ouch c or d to select the equalizer band to adjust. Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: LOW (low) î MID (mid) î HIGH (high) 4 T ouch b and then touch c or d to ad- just the level of the equalizer band. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the level of the equalization band. Audio Adjustments En 57 Section 13 Audio Adjustments
6 î î 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. 5 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the desired frequency . T ouch c or d until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display . Low : 40 î 80 î 100 î 160 (Hz) Mid: 200 î 500 î 1k î 2k (Hz) High: 3.15k î 8k î 10k î 12.5k (Hz) 6 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the desired Q factor . T ouch c or d until the desired Q factor ap- pears in the display . 2W î 1W î 1N î 2N Note If you make adjustments, CUSTOM curve is up- dated. Adjusting bass and treble Y ou can adjust bass and treble settings. ! If EQ-EX function has been selected and only when EQ-EX is turned on and CUSTOM is selected as the equalizer cur ve, you can adjust bass and treble set- tings. (Refer to Compensating for equalizer cur ves (EQ-EX) on page 60.) Adjusting bass Y ou can adjust the cut- off frequency and the bass level. ! If SFEQ has been set to FRONT1, bass ad- justment affects only the rear output: front output cannot be adjusted. (Refer to Setting the sound focus equalizer (SFEQ) on page 61.) 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch BASS. 2 T ouch c or d to select the desired fre- quency . T ouch c or d until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display . 40 î 63 î 100 î 160 (Hz) 3 T ouch a or b to adjust the bass level. Each time you touch a or b increases or de- creases the bass level. 6 î î 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Adjusting treble Y ou can adjust the cut- off frequency and the treble level. ! If SFEQ has been set to FRONT1 or FRONT2 , treble adjustment affects only the front output: rear output cannot be ad- justed. (Refer to Setting the sound focus equalizer (SFEQ) on page 61.) 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch TREBLE. 2 T ouch c or d to select the desired fre- quency . T ouch c or d until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display . 2.5k î 4k î 6.3k î 10k (Hz) 3 T ouch a or b to adjust the treble level. Each time you touch a or b increases or de- creases the treble level. 6 î î 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. Audio Adjustments En 58 Section 13
1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch LOUDNESS. 2 T ouch a to turn loudness on. # T o turn loudness off , touch b . 3 T ouch c or d to select a desired level. Each time you touch c or d selects level in the following order: LOW (low) î MID (mid) î HIGH (high) Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off . ! When the subwoofer output is on, you can adjust the cut-off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer . 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch SUB WOOFER. # When the subwoofer controller setting is PREOUT FULL , you cannot select SUB WOOFER . 2 T ouch d to turn subwoofer output on. # T o turn subwoofer output off , touch c . 3 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the phase of subwoofer output. T ouch d to select normal phase and NORMAL appears in the display. T ouch c to select reverse phase and REVERSE appears in the display . 4 T ouch b and then touch c or d to ad- just the output level of the subwoofer . Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the level of the subwoofer . 6 î î 6 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. 5 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect cut-off frequency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 50 î 80 î 125 (Hz) Only frequencies lower than those in the se- lected range are output from the subwoofer . Using non fading output When the non fading output setting is on, the audio signal does not pass through this unit î s low pass filter (for the subwoofer), but is out- put through the RCA output. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NON FADING. # When the subwoofer controller setting is only PREOUT FULL , you can select NON F ADING . (Refer to page 75.) 2 T ouch a to turn non fading output on. # T o turn non fading output off , touch b . 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the output level of the non fading. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the level of the non fading. 6 î î 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers, turn the HPF (high pass filter) on. Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers. Audio Adjustments En 59 Section 13 Audio Adjustments
1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch HPF. 3 T ouch a to turn high pass filter on. # T o turn high pass filter off , touch b . 4 T ouch c or d to select cut-off fre- quency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 50 î 80 î 125 (Hz) Note If you switch the SFEQ setting, the HPF function is automatically turned off . By turning the HPF function on after selecting the SFEQ setting, you can combine HPF function with SFEQ function. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad- just. 2 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 3 T ouch SLA. 4 T ouch a or b to adjust the source vo- lume. Each time you touch a or b increases or de- creases the source volume. 4 î î 4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM tuner volume level can also be ad- justed with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD and MP3 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! DVD and the optional DVD player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! AUX (auxiliar y input) and AV (video input) are set to the same source level adjustment vo - lume automatically . Compensating for equalizer curves (EQ-EX) The EQ-EX compensates for each equalizer cur ve. F urthermore, you can adjust bass and treble for each source when CUSTOM cur ve is selected. ! Y ou cannot use EQ-EX function and SFEQ function simultaneously. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch SFEQ/EQ-EX and then touch EQ-EX. 3 T ouch a to turn EQ-EX on. # T o turn EQ-EX off , touch b . Audio Adjustments En 60 Section 13
Setting the sound focus equalizer (SFEQ) Clarifying the sound image of vocals and in- struments allows the simple staging of a nat- ural, pleasant sound environment. Even greater listening enjoyment will be obtained if seating positions are chosen carefully . FRONT1 boosts the treble on the front output and the bass on the rear output. FRONT2 boosts the treble and the bass on the front out- put and the bass on the rear output. (The bass boost is the same for both front and rear .) F or both FRONT1 and FRONT2 , H setting provides a more pronounced effect than L setting. ! Y ou cannot use EQ-EX function and SFEQ function simultaneously. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch SFEQ/EQ-EX and then touch SFEQ. 3 T ouch a or b to select the desired SFEQ setting. T ouch a or b repeatedly to switch between the following settings: SFEQ OFF (off) î FRONT1-H (front 1-high) î FRONT1-L (front 1-low)î FRONT2-H (front 2-high) î FRONT2-L (front 2-low) î CUSTOM (custom) 4 T ouch c or d to select the desired posi- tion. T ouch c or d until the desired position ap- pears in the display . LEFT (left) î CENTER (center) î RIGHT (right) Notes ! If you adjust the bass or treble, CUSTOM memorizes an SFEQ setting in which the bass and treble are adjusted for personal prefer- ence. ! If you switch the SFEQ setting, the HPF func- tion is automatically turned off . By turning the HPF function on after selecting the SFEQ set- ting, you can combine HPF function with SFEQ function. Audio Adjustments En 61 Section 13 Audio Adjustments
Introduction of DSP adjustments 1 Y ou can use this unit to control multi-channel processor (DEQ-P7050), which is sold sepa- rately . By carr ying out the following settings/adjust- ments in order , you can create a finely-tuned sound field effortlessly . 1 Setting the speaker setting 2 Using the position selector 3 Adjusting the time alignment 4 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 5 Selecting a cut- off frequency 6 Adjusting the speaker output levels 7 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer 1 DSP display Shows the DSP function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch AUDIO to display the DSP function names. The DSP function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch to D. R. C or DUAL MONO . # When neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is se- lected in POSITION, you cannot switch to TIME ALIGN . # When neither CUSTOM1 nor CUSTOM2 is se- lected as an equalizer cur ve, you cannot switch to PEQ . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the DSP function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the source display. Using the sound field contr ol The SFC function creates the sensation of a live per formance. ! The acoustics of different per formance en- vironments are not the same and depend on the extent and contour of space through which sound waves move and on how sounds bounce off the stage, walls, floors and ceilings. At a live per formance you hear music in three stages: direct sound, early reflections, and late reflections, or re- verberations. Those factors are programed into the SFC circuitr y to recreate the acous- tics of various per formance settings. 1 Press EQ and hold to switch to SFC function. P ress EQ and hold until SFC appears in the display . # T o switch to equalizer function , press EQ and hold again. Digital Signal Processor En 62 Section 14
2 Press EQ to select the desired SFC mode. P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing mode: MUSICAL (musical) î DRAMA (drama) î ACTION (action)î JAZZ (jazz)î HALL (hall) î CLUB (club)î OFF (off) Note If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2- channel Dolby Digital audio and you select SFC effects that are most applicable for 5.1-channel audio (i.e., MUSICAL, DRAMA or ACTION ), we recommend turning Dolby Pro Logic on. On the other hand, when selecting SFC effects that are intended for use with 2-channel audio (i.e., JAZZ , HALL or CLUB ), we recommend turning Dolby P ro Logic off . Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automati- cally adjust the speaker output levels and in- serts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. When used in con- junction with the SFC, the feature will make the sound image more natural and offer a pa- noramic sound that envelops you. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch POSITION. 2 T ouch c /d /a /b to select a listening po- sition. T ouch one of these, c /d /a /b, to select a lis- tening position as listed in the table. Key Display Position c FRONT -L F ront seat left d FRONT -R F ront seat right a FRONT F ront seats b ALL All seats # T o cancel the selected listening position, touch the same key again. Note When you make adjustments for listening posi- tion, the speakers are automatically set for appro- priate output levels. Y ou can tailor them if you want as discussed under the heading of Adjust- ing the speaker output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the speaker output levels . Using balance adjustment Y ou can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch F AD/BAL. 2 T ouch a or b to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each time you touch a or b moves the front/ rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FRONT :25 î REAR:25 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FR:00 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust left/right speak- er balance. Each time you touch c or d moves the lef t/ right speaker balance towards the left or the right. Digital Signal Processor En 63 Section 14 Digital Signal Processor
LEFT :25 î RIGHT :25 is displayed as the left/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad- just. 2 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch SLA. 3 T ouch a or b to adjust the source vo- lume. Each time you touch a or b increases or de- creases the source volume. 4 î î 4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM tuner volume level can also be ad- justed with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD and MP3 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! DVD and the optional DVD player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! AUX (auxiliar y input) and AV (video input) are set to the same source level adjustment vo - lume automatically . Using the dynamic range control The dynamic range refers to the difference be- tween the largest and softest sounds. The dy- namic range control compresses this difference so that you can clearly hear sounds even at low volume levels. ! The dynamic range control is effective only on Dolby Digital sounds. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch D. R. C. # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch this mode. 2 T ouch a to turn the dynamic range con- trol on. # T o turn dynamic range control off , touch b . Using the dual mono mode When playing a disc recorded on a dual mono mode, you can select the channel to output. ! This function is effective only on dual mono mode sound. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch DUAL MONO. # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch this mode. 2 T ouch c or d to select the desired out- put setting. T ouch c or d until the desired output setting appears in the display . L R (left and right channels) î LEFT (left channel) î RIGHT (right channel) Digital Signal Processor En 64 Section 14
Using the direct contr ol Y ou can override audio settings to check for ef- fectiveness of your audio settings. ! All audio functions are locked out during the direct control is on except VOLUME . 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch DIRECT. 2 T ouch a to turn the direct control on. # T o turn direct control off , touch b . Using the Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic gives enhanced spatial and di- rectional effects, creating theater-like sense of presence and ambience. ! If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2-channel Dolby Digital audio and you se- lect SFC effects that are most applicable for 5.1-channel audio (i.e., MUSICAL , DRAMA or ACTION ), we recommend turn- ing Dolby P ro Logic on. On the other hand, when selecting SFC effects that are in- tended for use with 2-channel audio (i.e., JAZZ , HALL or CLUB ), we recommend turn- ing Dolby P ro Logic off . 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch DOLBY PL. 3 T ouch a to turn the Dolby Pr o Logic on. # T o turn Dolby P ro Logic off , touch b . Note When playing a 2-channel mono source with Pro Logic turned on, there may be occasions when the following will occur: ! No audio is output if the center speaker set- ting is SMALL or LARGE and no center speak- er is installed. ! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if installed and the center speaker setting is SMALL or LARGE . Setting the speaker setting Y ou need to make with/without (or yes/no) and size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/ad- justments depending on the installed speak- ers. The size needs to be set to LARGE (large) if the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds of about 100 Hz or below . Other wise select SMALL (small). ! Low frequency range is not output if the subwoofer is set to OFF and the front and rear speakers set to SMALL or OFF . ! It is imperative that non-installed speakers be set to OFF . ! Set the front or rear speaker to LARGE if the speaker is capable of reproducing bass content, or if no subwoofer is installed. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch SP SET. 3 T ouch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) î CENTER (center speaker) î REAR (rear speakers) î SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) î PHASE (sub- woofer setting) # Y ou can switch to PHASE only when the sub- woofer has been set to ON . Digital Signal Processor En 65 Section 14 Digital Signal Processor
4 T ouch c or d to select the correct size for the selected speaker . Each time you touch c or d selects the size in the following order: OFF (off) î SMALL (small) î LARGE (large) # Y ou cannot select OFF, when FRONT (front speakers) have been selected. # Y ou can select ON or OFF , when SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) has been selected. # Y ou can switch REVERSE (reverse phase) or NORMAL (normal phase), when PHASE (subwoo- fer setting) has been selected. Correcting the subwoofer î s phase If tr ying to boost the bass output of the sub- woofer doesn îÂÂt do much or rather makes you feel that the bass gets more murky , this may indicate that the subwoofer îÂÂs output and bass content you hear over other speakers cancel each other out. T o remove this problem, tr y changing the phase setting for the subwoofer . 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch SP SET. 3 T ouch a or b to select SUB WOOFER (subwoofer). Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) î CENTER (center speaker) î REAR (rear speakers) î SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) î PHASE (sub- woofer setting) 4 T ouch d to turn subwoofer output on. # T o turn subwoofer output off , touch c . 5 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the phase of subwoofer output. T ouch d to select normal phase and NORMAL appears in the display. T ouch c to select reverse phase and REVERSE appears in the display . Note When playing a 2-channel mono source with Pro Logic turned on, there may be occasions when the following will occur: ! No audio is output if the center speaker set- ting is SMALL or LARGE and no center speak- er is installed. ! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if installed and the center speaker setting is SMALL or LARGE . Selecting a cut-off frequency Y ou can select a frequency, under which sounds are reproduced through the subwoo- fer . If the installed speakers include one whose size has been set to SMALL, you can select a frequency , under which sounds are repro- duced through a LARGE speaker or subwoo- fer . 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch CUT OFF. 3 T ouch c or d to select cut-off fre- quency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 63 î 80 î 100 î 125 î 160 î 200 (Hz) Note Selecting a cut-off frequency is to set a cut-off fre- quency of the subwoofer î s L.P .F . (low-pass filter) and that of the SMALL speaker H .P .F . (high-pass filter). The cut-off frequency setting has no effect if the subwoofer is set to OFF and other speakers are set to LARGE or OFF . Digital Signal Processor En 66 Section 14
Adjusting the speaker output levels Y ou can readjust the speaker output levels using a test tone while listening to music. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch SP LEVEL. 3 T ouch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT L (front speaker left) î CENTER (center speaker) î FRONT R (front speaker right) î REAR R (rear speaker right)î REAR L (rear speaker lef t) î SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set OFF . 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 î îÂÂ10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. Note T o adjust the speaker output levels at this mode is the same as making the speaker output levels at TEST TONE . Both provide the same results. Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone A convenient test tone allows you to easily get the overall balance right among the speakers. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch TEST TONE. 3 T ouch ST ART to start the test tone out- put. The test tone is output. It rotates from speaker to speaker in the following sequence at inter- vals of about two seconds. The current set- tings for the speaker over which you hear the test tone are shown in the display . FRONT L (front speaker left) î CENTER (center speaker) î FRONT R (front speaker right) î REAR R (rear speaker right)î REAR L (rear speaker lef t) î SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) Check each speaker output level. If no adjust- ments are needed, per form step 5 to stop the test tone. # Y ou can also start the test tone output by mov- ing the joystick up. # The settings do not appear for speakers whose size is set OFF . 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 î îÂÂ10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. # The test tone rotates to the next speaker af ter about two seconds from the last operation. 5 T ouch STOP to stop the test tone out- put. # Y ou can also stop the test tone output by mov- ing the joystick down. Notes ! If needed, select speakers and adjust their î ab- solute î output levels. (Refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels on this page.) ! T o adjust the speaker output levels at this mode is the same as making the speaker out- put levels at SP LEVEL. Both provide the same results. Digital Signal Processor En 67 Section 14 Digital Signal Processor
Adjusting the time alignment By adjusting the distance between each speaker and a selected listening position, you can insert delay times into the speaker output to obtain a correct sound image and overall level balance. Although this is automatically achieved when you set the listening position, the time alignment feature provides a fine ad- justment. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch TIME ALIGN. # Y ou cannot select TIME ALIGN when neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is selected in POSITION . 3 T ouch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT L (front speaker left) î CENTER (center speaker) î FRONT R (front speaker right) î REAR R (rear speaker right)î REAR L (rear speaker lef t) î SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set OFF . 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the distance be- tween the selected speaker and the listen- ing position. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the distance. 0.0 î 500.0 [cm] is dis- played as the distance is increased or decreased. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves: Display Equalizer curve SUPER BASS Super bass POWERFUL P ower ful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal FLA T Flat CUSTOM1 Custom 1 CUSTOM2 Custom 2 ! CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 are adjusted equalizer cur ves. ! When FLA T is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. 1 Press EQ and hold to switch to equali- zer function. P ress EQ and hold until an equalizer cur ve name appears in the display . # T o switch to SFC function, press EQ and hold again. 2 Press EQ to select the equalizer . P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: SUPER BASS î POWERFUL î NA TURAL î VOCAL î FLA T î CUSTOM1 î CUSTOM2 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer Fo r CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 equalizer cur ves, you can adjust the front, rear and cen- ter equalizer cur ves separately by selecting a Digital Signal Processor En 68 Section 14
center frequency, an equalizer level and a Q factor for each band. ! A separate CUSTOM1 curve can be cre- ated for each source. ! A CUSTOM2 cur ve can be created com- mon to all sources. ! The center speaker largely determines the sound image and getting the balance right isn îÂÂt easy . W e recommend reproducing a 2- ch. audio (a CD for example) and getting the balance right among the speakers ex- cept for the center , and then reproducing a 5.1-ch. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and ad- justing the center speaker output to the balance you have already got among the other speakers. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT twice. 2 T ouch PEQ. # Y ou cannot select PEQ when neither CUSTOM1 nor CUSTOM2 equalizer cur ve is se- lected. 3 T ouch a or b to select the desired item. Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: SP-SEL (speakers) î BAND (bands) î FREQUENCY (center frequency)î LEVEL (equalizer level) î Q. FACTOR (Q factor) 4 T ouch c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. T ouch c or d until the desired speaker ap- pears in the display . REAR (rear speakers) î CENTER (center speak- er) î FRONT (front speakers) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set OFF . 5 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the equalizer band to be adjusted. Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: LOW (low) î MID (mid) î HIGH (high) 6 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the center frequency of selected band. T ouch c or d until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display . 100 î 125 î 160 î 200 î 250 î 315 î 400 î 500 î 630 î 800 î 1k î 1.25k î 1.6k î 2k î 2.5k î 3.15k î 4k î 5k î 6.3k î 8k (Hz) 7 T ouch b and then touch c or d to ad- just the equalizer level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the equalizer level. 06 î îÂÂ06 is dis- played as the level is increased or decreased. 8 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the desired Q factor . Each time you touch c or d switches between the following Q factor: WIDE (wide) î NARROW (narrow) # Y ou can adjust parameters for each band of the other speakers in the same way . Note Y ou can select a center frequency from among 20 frequencies for each band. Y ou can change the center frequency in 1/3-octave steps, but you can- not select frequencies that have inter vals shorter than 1 octave among the center frequencies of the three bands. Digital Signal Processor En 69 Section 14 Digital Signal Processor
Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 1 Y ou can use this menu to change audio, subti- tle, parental lock and other DVD settings. ! When watching a DVD/Video CD on the rear display independently , you cannot op- erate this menu. 1 DVD setup menu display Shows the DVD setup menu names. 1 T ouch g . SETUP will be displayed instead of MENU . 2 T ouch SETUP when the disc is stopped. The DVD setup menu is displayed. # When SETUP is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display DVD SETUP by pressing MENU on the remote control when the disc is stopped. 3 T ouch either LANGUAGE or VISUAL to display the DVD setup function names. The DVD setup function names in selected menu are displayed. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the DVD setup function within about 30 seconds, the display is automati- cally returned to the playback display . Setting the subtitle language Y ou can set a desired subtitle language. If the selected subtitle language is recorded on the DVD, subtitles are displayed in that language. 1 T ouch SETUP and LANGUAGE and then touch SUB. T LANG. A subtitle language menu is displayed and the currently set language is highlighted. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT . # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV . 2 T ouch the desired language. A subtitle language is set. # If you have selected OTHERS, refer to When you select OTHERS on the next page . Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is displayed. ! Y ou can also switch the subtitle language by touching SUB.T during playback. (Refer to Changing the subtitle language during play- back (Multi-subtitle) on page 30.) ! Even if you use SUB.T to switch the subtitle language, this does not affect the settings here. Setting up the DVD player En 70 Section 15
When you select OTHERS When you select OTHERS, a language code input display is shown. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 89 to input the four digit code of the desired language. 1 T ouch 0 îÂÂ9 to input the language code. # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C . # Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . 2 While the input number is displayed, touch ENTER. Setting the audio language Y ou can set the preferred audio language. 1 T ouch SETUP and LANGUAGE and then touch AUDIO LANG. An audio language menu is displayed and the currently set language is highlighted. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT . # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV . 2 T ouch the desired language. The audio language is set. # If you have selected OTHERS, refer to When you select OTHERS on this page . Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is output. ! Y ou can also switch the audio language by touching AUDIO during playback. (Refer to Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) on page 30.) ! Even if you use AUDIO to switch the audio language, this does not affect the settings here. Setting the menu language Y ou can set the preferred language for dis- plays of menus recorded on a disc. 1 T ouch SETUP and LANGUAGE and then touch MENU LANG. A menu language menu is displayed and the currently set language is highlighted. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT . # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV . 2 T ouch the desired language. The menu language is set. # If you have selected OTHERS, refer to When you select OTHERS on this page . Note If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is dis- played. Setting assist subtitles on or off Assist subtitles offer explanations for the au- rally impaired. However , they are only dis- played if they are recorded on the DVD. Y ou can turn assist subtitles on or off as de- sired. 1 T ouch SETUP and LANGUAGE and then touch NEXT. Setting up the DVD player En 71 Section 15 Setting up the DVD player
2 T ouch A SUB TITL. 3 T ouch a to turn assist subtitles on. # T o turn assist subtitles off , touch b . Setting angle icon display Y ou can set up that the angle icon appears on scenes where the angle can be switched. 1 T ouch SETUP and VISUAL and then touch M. ANGLE. 2 T ouch a to turn angle icon display on. # T o turn angle icon display off , touch b . Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display . A wide screen display has a width-to -height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display connected to REAR MONITOR OUT . ! When using a regular display , select either LETTER BOX or P ANSCAN . Selecting 16 : 9 may result in an unnatural picture. ! If you select the TV aspect, this unit î s dis- play changes to the same setting. 1 T ouch SETUP and VISUAL and then touch TV ASPECT. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the TV aspect. ! 16 : 9 î Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis- played as it is (initial setting) ! LETTER BOX î The picture is the shape of a letter box with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen ! P ANSCAN î The picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify P ANSCAN , playback is with LETTER BOX even if you select the P ANSCAN setting. Con- firm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. (See page 8.) ! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc î si n - structions. Setting the parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict the viewing of violent and adult oriented scenes by children. Y ou can set the parental lock level in steps as desired. ! When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis- played. In this case, playback will begin when the correct code number is input. Setting the code number and level When you first use this function, register your code number . If you do not register a code number , parental lock will not operate. 1 T ouch SETUP and VISUAL and then touch P ARENT AL. 2 T ouch 0 îÂÂ9 to input a four digit code number . 3 While the input number is displayed, touch ENTER. The code number is set, and you can now set the level. Setting up the DVD player En 72 Section 15
4 T ouch any of 1 îÂÂ8 to select the desir ed level. The parental lock level is set. ! LEVEL 8 î Playback of the entire disc is pos- sible (initial setting) ! LEVEL 7 î LEVEL 2 î Playback of discs for children and non-adult oriented discs is possible ! LEVEL 1 î Playback of discs for children only is possible Notes ! W e recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. ! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. Y ou can confirm it by looking at the disc pack- age, included literature or on the disc itself . With discs that do not feature a recorded par- ental lock level, you cannot use parental lock. ! With some discs, parental lock operates to skip certain scenes only , after which normal playback resumes. F or details, refer to the disc îÂÂs instructions. Changing the level Y ou can change the set parental lock level. 1 T ouch SETUP and VISUAL and then touch P ARENT AL. 2 T ouch 0 îÂÂ9 to input the registered code number . 3 T ouch ENTER. This enters the code number , and you can now change the level. # If you input an incorrect code number , the icon is displayed. T ouch C and input the cor- rect code number . # If you forget your code number , refer to If you forget your code number on this page. 4 T ouch any of 1 îÂÂ8 to select the desir ed level. The new parental lock level is set. If you forget your code number Refer to Changing the level on this page, and touch C 10 times. The registered code number is canceled, letting you register a new one. Setting r emote control code type When the remote control operation switch is set to DVD, changing the remote control code type enables you to operate the P ioneer DVD player by the supplied remote control. There are three remote codes, code type A, code type B and code type AV H . When using this unit with a multi-DVD player (e.g. XDV -P9), se- lect code A. When using this unit only, select code AV H . ! With this unit, code B cannot be used. 1 Set the remote control selection switch on the left side of the remote control to the approp riate position with a pen tip or other pointed instrument . ! If you select AV H mode, there is no need to take the following procedure. ! If you select A /B mode, take the following procedure and change the code type to the appropriate type. 2 Press 7 and 0 on the remote control si- multaneously to change the code type. Initially , the code type is set to A. Each time you press 7 and 0 simultaneously on the re- mote control the code type switches between A and B . Setting up the DVD player En 73 Section 15 Setting up the DVD player
Adjusting initial settings 1 Initial settings lets you per form initial set up of different settings for this unit. 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch SOURCE OFF to turn this unit off. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch A.MENU and then touch INITIAL to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # When the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ- P7050) is connected to this unit, you can operate DIGTL A TT instead of REAR SP . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Setting the FM tuning step The FM tuning step employed by seek tuning can be switched between 100 kHz, the preset step, and 50 kHz. 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch FM STEP. 2 T ouch c or d to select the FM tuning step. T ouching c or d will switch the FM tuning step between 100 kHz and 50 kHz. The se- lected FM tuning step will appear in the dis- play . Note If seek tuning is per formed in 50 kHz steps, sta- tions may be tuned in imprecisely . T une in the sta- tions with manual tuning or use seek tuning again. Setting the AM tuning step The AM tuning step can be switched between 9 kHz, the preset step, and 10 kHz. When using the tuner in North, Central or South America, reset the tuning step from 9 kHz (531 î 1,602 kHz allowable) to 10 kHz (530 î 1,640 kHz allowable). 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch AM STEP. 2 T ouch c or d to select the AM tuning step. T ouching c or d will switch the AM tuning step between 9 kHz and 10 kHz. The selected AM tuning step will appear in the display. Initial Settings En 74 Section 16
Switching the war ning tone If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turni ng off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. Y ou can turn off the warning tone. 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch DT . W ARNING. 2 T ouch a to turn warning tone on. # T o turn warning tone off , touch b . Switching the auxiliary setting It is possible to use auxiliar y equipment with this unit. Activate the auxiliar y setting when using auxiliar y equipment connected to this unit. 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch AUX. 2 T ouch a to turn auxiliary setting on. # T o turn auxiliar y setting off , touch b . Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller This unit îÂÂs rear output (rear speaker leads out- put and RCA rear output) can be used for full- range speaker ( REAR SP FULL ) or subwoofer ( REAR SP SUB. W ) connection. If you switch the rear output setting to the REAR SP SUB. W , you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer without using an auxiliar y amp. Initially , the unit is set for rear full-range spea k- er connection ( REAR SP FULL ). When rear out- put are connected to full range speakers (when REAR SP FULL is selected), you can connect the RCA subwoofer output to a sub- woofer . In this case, you can select whether to use the subwoofer controller îÂÂs (low pass filter , phase) built-in PREOUT SUB.W or the auxili- ar y PREOUT FULL . ! When the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7050) is connected to this unit, you cannot operate this function. 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch REAR SP. 2 T ouch a or b to switch the rear output setting. T ouch a to select full-range speaker and REAR SP FULL appears in the display . T ouch b to select subwoofer and REAR SP SUB. W ap- pears in the display . # When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select REAR SP FULL . # When a subwoofer is connected to the rear output, set for subwoofer REAR SP SUB. W . # When the rear output setting is REAR SP SUB. W , you cannot change the sub- woofer controller . 3 T ouch c or d to switch the subwoofer output or non fading output. T ouch c to select subwoofer output and PREOUT SUB.W appears in the display . T ouch d to select non fading output and PREOUT FULL appears in the display . Notes ! Even if you change this setting, there is no output unless you turn the non fading output (refer to Using non fading output on page 59) or subwoofer output (refer to Using subwoofer output on page 59) in the audio menu on. ! If you change the subwoofer controller , sub- woofer output and non fading output in the audio menu return to the factor y settings. Initial Settings En 75 Section 16 Initial Settings
! Both rear speaker leads output and RCA rear output are switched simultaneously in this setting. Correcting distort ed sound Y ou can minimize distortion likely caused by the equalizer cur ve settings. Setting an equalizer level high can cause dis- tortion. If high sound is crippled or distorted, tr y switching to LOW. Norma lly , leave the set- ting at HIGH to ensure quality sound. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7050) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch DIGTL A TT. 2 T ouch c or d to switch the digital at- tenuator setting. T ouch c to select low setting and LOW ap- pears in the display . T ouch d to select high setting and HIGH appears in the display . Switching the sound muting/attenuation Sound from this system is muted or attenu- ated automatically when a call is made or re- ceived using a cellular telephone connected to this unit. ! The sound is turned off , MUTE or AT T is displayed and no audio adjustment is pos- sible. ! Operation returns to normal when the phone connection is ended. 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch TEL/GUIDE. 3 T ouch c or d to select any of the mut- ing, attenuation or mixing. T ouch c or d until the desired setting appears in the display . ! MUTE î Muting ! AT T î Attenuation ! MIXING î Mixing # When the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ- P7050) is connected to this unit, you can select in the following setting: ! MUTE î Muting ! A TT20 î Attenuation (A TT20 has a stronger effect than A TT10 ) ! A TT10 î Attenuation ! MIXING î Mixing Switching the automatic disc playback Y ou can turn automatic disc playback on or off when you insert a disc into the disc loading slot. When this function is on, the disc will be automatically played after it is inserted into the disc loading slot. Initially , this function is set to on. 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch DVD AUTO. 3 T ouch a to turn automatic disc play- back on. # T o turn automatic disc playback off , touch b . Initial Settings En 76 Section 16
Switching the dimmer setting for sub-display T o prevent the sub-display from being too bright at night, the sub-display is automati- cally dimmed when the car îÂÂs headlights are turned on. Y ou can turn dimmer on or off . 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch SUB. D DIM. 3 T ouch a to turn dimmer on. # T o turn dimmer off , touch b . Initial Settings En 77 Section 16 Initial Settings
Introduction of setup adjustments 1 1 Setup menu display Shows the setup function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch SETUP to display the setup function names. The setup function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the setup function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the source display. Setting the video input Y ou can switch the setting according to the connected component. ! Select VIDEO to watch video of a con- nected component as AV source. ! Select M-DVD to watch video of a con- nected DVD player as S-DVD source. 1 T ouch A.MENU and SETUP and then touch A V INPUT. 2 T ouch c or d to select the video input setting. T ouch c or d until the desired setting appears in the display . ! OFF î No video component is connected ! VIDEO î External video component ! M-DVD î DVD player connected with RCA cable # When a DVD player is connected with an AV - BUS cable, do not select M-DVD or else no pic- ture is displayed even if you select S-DVD . Setting for back-up camera This unit features a function that automatically switches to the back-up camera video ( BACK UP CAMERA IN jack) when a back-up camera is installed on your car . When the gear shif t is in REVERSE (R) position, the video automati- cally switches to a back-up camera video. (For more details, consult with your dealer .) ! W e recommend that you use a camera which outputs mirror reversed images. ! Confirm the setting immediately whether the display changes to a back-up camera video when the gear shift is moved to RE- VERSE (R) from another position. ! When the display changes to a back-up camera video during normal drivings, switch to another setting. ! T o return to the source display , press MENU on the head unit. 1 T ouch A.MENU and SETUP and then touch B-CAMERA. 2 T ouch a to turn back-up camera setting on. # T o turn back-up camera setting off , touch b . Other Functions En 78 Section 17
3 T ouch c or d to select an appropriate setting for polarity . Each time you touch c or d switches between the following polarity : ! BA TTER Y î When the polarity of the con- nected lead is positive while the gear shif t is REVERSE (R) position ! GND î When the polarity of the connected lead is negative while the gear shift is RE- VERSE (R) position Setting the automatic open function T o prevent the display from hitting the shift lever of an automatic vehicle when it is in P (park) position, or when you do not wish the display to open/close automatically, you can set the automatic open function in the manual mode. F urthermore, to adjust the LCD panel slide po - sition, you can turn the set back on or off . 1 T ouch A.MENU and SETUP and then touch FLAP SET. 2 T ouch a to turn the set back on, and the LCD panel slides to the back. # T o turn the set back off , touch b and the LCD panel slides to the front. 3 T ouch c or d to select the display to open/close automatically or manually . T ouch c to select MANUAL, and you have to press OPEN/CLOSE to open/close the display . T ouch d to select AUTO, and the display auto - matically opens/closes when power to this unit is turned on. Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 T ouch A.MENU and SETUP and then touch CLOCK ADJ. 2 T ouch OFF to turn the clock display on. ON will appear in the display instead of OFF . Clock display is now on. # Y ou can also turn the clock display on or off by pressing FLIP DOWN/CLOCK when the LCD panel is closed. # T o turn the clock display off , touch ON . 3 T ouch c or d to select the segment of the clock display you wish to set. Each time you touch c or d will select one segment of the clock display: Hour î Minute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will be highlighted. 4 T ouch a or b to set the clock. Each time you touch a will increase the se- lected hour or minute. Each time you touch b will decrease the selected hour or minute. Notes ! Y ou can match the clock to a time signal by touching JUST . î If the minute is 00î 29 , the minutes are rounded down. (e.g., 10:18 becomes 10:00 .) î If the minute is 30î 59 , the minutes are rounded up. (e.g., 10:36 becomes 11:00 .) ! Even when the sources are off , the clock dis- play appears on the display. Other Functions En 79 Section 17 Other Functions
Using the AUX source An IP -BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD -RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect this unit to auxiliar y equipment fea- turing RCA output. For more details, refer to the IP -BUS-RCA Interconnector owner îÂÂs man- ual. Selecting AUX as the source % T ouch the source icon and then touch AUX to select AUX as the source. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # If the auxiliar y setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. For more details, see Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 75. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, touch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NAME EDIT. 2 T ouch ABC to select the desired charac- ter type. T ouch ABC repeatedly to switch between the following character type: Alphabet (upper case), numbers and symbols î Alphabet (lower case) # Y ou can select to input numbers and symbols by touching 123 . 3 T ouch a or b to select a letter of the al- phabet. Each time you touch a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C ... X Y Z , numbers and symbols in 1 2 3 ... | } ï order . Each time you touch b will display a letter in the reverse order , such as Z Y X ... C B A order . 4 T ouch d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the desired letter is displayed, touch d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . T ouch c to move backwards in the display. 5 T ouch OK to store the entered title in memory . 6 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . Switching the background display Y ou can switch background displays while lis- tening to each source. % Press ENTERT AINMENT. Each time you press ENTERT AINMENT the display changes in the following order: Audio source Background still picture î BGV (background visual) î AV (video input) î DVD (DVD player) Video source Video of currently selected source î Back- ground still picture î BGV (background visual) î AV (video input)î DVD (DVD player) Notes ! In the following cases, the background display will not change: Other Functions En 80 Section 17
î When the AV (video input) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 78). î When the DVD/Vide CD playback is not turned on for rear display (refer to page 17). ! Dolphin movie will not appear when the touch panel keys or the list is displayed. Using the PGM button Y ou can operate the preprogrammed functions for each source by using PGM . % Press PGM to tur n pause on when se- lecting the following sources: ! DVD î Built-in DVD player ! S-DVD î DVD player/multi-DVD player ! M-CD î Multi-CD player # T o turn pause off , press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to tur n BSM on when selecting TUNER as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to tur n BSSM on when selecting TV as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. Other Functions En 81 Section 17 Other Functions
T roubleshooting Common Symptom Cause Action (See) P ower doesn îÂÂt turn on. The unit doesn îÂÂt operate. Leads and connecto rs are incor- rectly connected . Confirm once mor e that all connect ions are correct. The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then replace the fuse. Be ver y sure to install the correct fuse with the same rate. Noise and other factors are causing the built-in microprocess or to oper- ate incorrectly. P ress RESET .( P a g e8 ) Operation wi th the remote con- trol isn îÂÂt possible. The unit does not operate cor- rectly even when the appropriate remote cont rol buttons are pressed. The remote control operation mode is incorr ect. Switch to the correct remote control mode. (P age 14) The remote control code is incor- rect. Make sure the remote control selection switch setting and code type setting are the same. (P age 73) Batter y powe r is low . Load new batter y. (P age 9) Some ope rations are prohibited with certain discs. Check usi ng another disc. Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty . Clean disc. (P age 85) The loaded disc is a type this unit cannot play . Check what type the disc is. Non compat ible video system disc is loaded. Change to a disc compatible to your video system. No sounds are heard. The volume level will not rise. Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly. The unit is per forming still, slow mo - tion or frame-by- frame playback . There is no sound during still, slow motion or frame-by-frame playback. There îÂÂs no picture. The parking brake cord is not con- nected. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The parking brake is not applied. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The icon is displ ayed, and op- eration is not possible. The operation is prohibited for the disc. This operation is not possible. The operation is not compatible with the disc î s organization. This operation is not possible. The picture stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. Reading of data has becom e impos- sible during playback . After pressing g once, start playback once more. There îÂÂs no sound. V olume level is low . The volume level is low . Adjust the volume level. The attenuator is on. T urn the attenuator off. There îÂÂs audio and video skip- ping. This unit is not firmly secured. Secure this unit firmly. The picture is stretched, the as- pect is incorrect. The aspect setting is incorrect for the displ ay . Select the appropriate setting for your display . (P age 72) Additional Information En 82 Appendix
Symptom Cause Action (See) Rear display picture disappears. The source disc being listened to with the head unit has been ejected. Before ejectin g the disc, switch the source. This problem may occur when certa in con- nection methods are used. When the ignition switch is turned ON (or turned to ACC), the motor sounds. This unit confirms whether a disc is loaded or not. This is a normal operation. Nothing is displayed. The touch pane l keys cannot use. The back-up camer a is not con- nected. B-CAMERA is incorrect setting. Connect a back-up camera. P ress MENU on the head unit to return to the source display and then select the correct set- ting for B-CAMERA . (P age 78) Problems during DVD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re- gion number from this unit. Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. (P age 6, P age 91) A parental lock message is dis- played and playback is not pos- sible. P arental lock is on. T urn parental loc k off or change the level. (P age 72) P arental lock cannot be can- celed. The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number . (P age 72) Y ou have forgot ten your code num- ber . P ress CLEAR 10 times to cancel the code number . (P age 73) Dialog langua ge (and subtitle language) cannot be switched. The DVD playing does not feature multiple language recordings . Y ou cannot switch among multiple languages if they aren îÂÂt recorded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature subtitles. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not re- corded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. Playback is not with the audio language and subti tle language settings selected in DVD SETUP . The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the langua ge selected in DVD SETUP . Switching to a selected language is not possi- ble if the language selected in DVD SETUP is not recorded on the disc. Switching the viewing angle is not possibl e. The DVD playing does not feature scenes shot from multiple angles. Y ou cannot switch betwee n multiple angles if the DVD does not feature sce nes recorded from multiple angles. Y ou are tr ying to switch to multiple angle viewing of a scene that is not recorded from multiple angles. Switch between multiple angle s when watch- ing scene s recorded from multiple angles. The picture is extremely unclear/ distorted and dark during play- back. The disc features a signal to prohibit copying. (Some discs may have this.) Since this unit is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system, when play- ing a disc that has a signal prohibiting copy- ing, the picture may suffer from horizontal stripes or other imper fections when viewed on some displays. This does not mean this unit is malfunctioning. Additional Information En 83 Appendix Additional Information
Problems during Video CD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) The PBC (playback control) menu display cannot be called up. The Video CD playing does not fea- ture PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs not featuring PBC. PBC is turned off . T urn PBC on. (P age 32, P age 35) Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. PBC is turned on. T urn PBC off . (P age 32, P age 35) Error messages When problems occur with disc playback, an error message appears on the display . Refer to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error persists, contact your dealer or your nearest PIONEER Ser vice Center . Message Cause Action (See) ERROR-02 Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Replace disc. ERROR-05 Electrical or mechanical P ress RESET . DIFFERENT REGION DISC (RE- GION ERR) The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct regio n number . NON PLA Y ABLE DISC (NON- PLA Y) This type of disc cannot be played by this unit Replace the disc with one this unit can play. The disc is loaded upside d own Check that the disc is loaded correctly . THERMAL PROTECTION IN MOTION (TEMP) The temperature of this unit is out- side of the normal operating range W ait until the unit î s temperature returns to within normal operating limits. Additional Information En 84 Appendix
DVD player and care ! Use only normal, round discs. If you insert irregular , non-round, shaped discs they may jam in the DVD player or not play prop- erly . ! Check all discs for cracks, scratches or warped discs before playing. Discs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly . Do not use such discs. ! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed side) sur face when handling the disc. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che- micals to the sur face of the discs. ! T o clean dirt from a disc, wipe the disc with a sof t cloth outward from the center of the disc. ! If the heater is used in cold weather , moist - ure may form on components inside the DVD player . Condensation may cause the DVD player to not operate properly. If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the DVD player for an hour or so to allow the DVD player to dr y out and wipe any damp discs with a sof t cloth to remove the moisture. ! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. DVD discs ! With some DVD video discs, it may not be possible to use certain functions. ! It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode). It is not possible to play back DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode). ! It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/ DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode), be- cause of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. ! It is not possible to play back DVD -ROM/ DVD-RAM discs. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD -R/CD-RW discs are used, play- back is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re- corder or a personal computer because of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. Additional Information En 85 Appendix Additional Information
! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) ! Playback of CD-R/C D-RW discs may be- come impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the sto - rage conditions in the car . ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD -RW disc may not be dis- played by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD -DA)). ! This unit conforms to the track skip func- tion of the CD -R/CD-RW disc. The tracks containing the track skip information are skipped automatically (in case of audio data (CD -DA)). ! If you insert a CD -RW disc into this unit, time to playback will be longer than when you insert a conventional CD or CD-R disc. ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD -RW discs before using them. MP3 files ! MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard. ! This unit allows playback of MP3 files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs. Disc re- cordings compatible with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system can be played back. ! It is possible to play back multi-session compatible recorded discs. ! MP3 files are not compatible with packet write data transfer . ! The max. number of characters which can be displayed for a file name, including the extension (.mp3), is 32 characters from the first character . ! The max. number of characters which can be displayed for a folder name is 32 charac- ters. ! In case of files recorded according to the Romeo and Joliet file system, only the first 32 characters can be displayed. ! When playing discs with MP3 files and audio data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA. ! The folder selection sequence for playback and other operations becomes the writing sequence used by the writing sof tware. For this reason, the expected sequence at the time of playback may not coincide with the actual playback sequence. However , there also is some writing software which per- mits setting of the playback order . ! Files are compatible with the ID3 T ag V er . 1.0 and V er . 1.1 formats for display of album (disc title), track (track title) and ar- tist (track artist). ! Only when MP3 files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequencies are played back, the emphasis function is valid. (16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz sampling frequencies can be played back.) ! There is no m3u playlist compatibility. ! There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3 interactive) or mp3 PRO format. ! The sound quality of MP3 files generally be- comes better with increasing bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy a certain sound quality , it is recom- mended to use only discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps. Important ! When naming an MP3 file, add the corre- sponding filename extension (.mp3). ! This unit plays back files with the filename ex- tension (.mp3) as an MP3 file. T o prevent Additional Information En 86 Appendix
noise and malfunctions, do not use this exten- sion for files other than MP3 files. About folders and MP3 files ! An outline of a CD-ROM with MP3 files on it is shown below . Subfolders are shown as folders in the folder currently selected. 3 1 2 1 First level 2 Second level 3 Third level Notes ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user can not assign folder numbers. ! It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3 files. (These folders will be skipped without displaying the folder number .) ! MP3 files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back. However , there is a delay in the start of playback on discs with numerous tiers. For this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers. ! It is possible to play back up to 253 items from folder on one disc. Using the display correctly CAUTION ! If moisture or foreign matter should get inside this unit, turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Using this unit in this condition may result in a fire or electric shock, or other failure. ! If you notice smoke, a strange noise or smell, or any other abnormal signs from the display , turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIO- NEER Ser vice Station. Using this unit in this condition may result in failure of the system. ! Do not disassemble or modify this unit, as there are high-voltage components inside which may cause an electric shock. Be sure to consult your dealer or the nearest author- ized PIONEER Ser vice Station for internal in- spection, adjustments or repairs. Handling the display ! When the display is subjected to direct sun- light for a long period of time, it will be- come ver y hot resulting in possible damage to the LCD screen. When not using this unit, close the display and avoid exposing it to direct sunlight as much as possible. Additional Information En 87 Appendix Additional Information
! The display should be used within the tem- perature ranges shown below . Operating temperature range: îÂÂ10 to 50 ðC Storage temperature range: îÂÂ20 to 80 ðC At temperatures higher or lower than the operating temperature range the display may not operate normally. ! The LCD screen of this unit is exposed in order to increase its visibility within the ve- hicle. Please do not press strongly on it as this may damage it. ! Do not place anything on the display when it is deployed. Also, do not attempt to carr y out angle adjustment, or open/close the display by hand. Applying strong force to the display may damage it. ! Do not push the LCD screen with much force as this may scratch it. ! Be careful not to place anything between the display and the main body when the display is opening or closing. If an object gets between the display and main body , the display may stop working. Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen ! If the display is near the vent of an air con- ditioner when it is opened, make sure that air from the air conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from the heater may break the LCD screen, and cool air from the cooler may cause moisture to form inside the dis- play resulting in possible damage. Also, if the display is cooled down by the cooler , the screen may become dark, or the life span of the small fluorescent tube used in- side the display may be shortened. ! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots) may appear on the LCD screen. These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a problem with the display . ! At low temperatures, the LCD screen may be dark for a while af ter the power is turned on. ! The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is exposed to direct sunlight. ! When using a portable phone, keep the an- tenna of the portable phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. Keeping the display in good condition ! When removing dust from the screen or cleaning the display , first turn the system power off , then wipe with the supplied cloth. ! When wiping the screen, take care not to scratch the sur face. Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners. Small fluorescent tube ! A small fluorescent tube is used inside the display to illuminate the LCD screen. î The fluorescent tube should last for ap- proximately 10,000 hours, depending on operating conditions. (Using the display at low temperatures reduces the ser vice life of the fluorescent tube.) î When the fluorescent tube reaches the end of its useful life, the screen will be dark and the image will no longer be projected. If this happens, consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIO - NEER Ser vice Station. Additional Information En 88 Appendix
Language code chart for DVD Language (code), input code L anguage (code), input code Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 P ashto, P ushto (ps), 1619 English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721 F rench (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814 German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Romanian (ro), 1815 Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyar wanda (r w), 1823 Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 P ortuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sangho (sg), 1907 Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo- Croatian (sh), 1908 Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911 Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Geor gian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915 Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Alban ian (sq), 1917 Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918 Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati ( ss), 1919 Aymara (ay), 012 5 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 T amil (ta), 2001 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 T elugu (te), 2005 Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 T ajik (tg), 2007 Bislama (bi), 0209 Laothian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008 Bengali (bn), 0214 Lithuan ian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian (lv), 1222 T urkmen (tk), 2011 Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 T agalog (tl), 2012 Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014 Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 T onga (to) , 2015 Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 T urkish (tr), 2018 W elsh (cy), 0325 Mongolian (mn ), 1314 T songa (ts), 2019 Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 T atar (tt), 2020 Bhutani ( dz), 0426 Marat hi (mr), 1318 T wi (tw), 2023 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Estonian (et), 0520 Malte se (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118 Basque (eu), 0521 Burme se (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126 P ersian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 Volapük (vo), 2215 Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no ), 1415 W olof (wo) , 2315 F aroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408 F risian (fy ), 0625 Oromo (om ), 1513 Y oruba (yo), 2515 Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu ), 2621 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 P anjabi (pa), 1601 Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612 Additional Information En 89 Appendix Additional Information
T erms Aspect ratio This is the width-to -height ratio of a TV screen. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps units (bits per second). The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. With DVD video discs fea- turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters. DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system delivering multi-channel audio from up to 6 independent channels. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in a MP3 file. This embedded in- formation can include the track title, the ar- tist îÂÂs name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 T ag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted to the number of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for- mat logic of CD -ROM folders and files. F or the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con- sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the î _î sign, with a file-extension of three charac- ters.) Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (in- cluding the separation mark î .î and a file ex- tension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. Generally , DVDs are re- corded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide higher sound quality . m3u Playlists created using the î WINAMP î soft- ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working Additional Information En 90 Appendix
group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan- dards Organization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a con- ventional disc. MPEG This stands for Moving P ictures Experts Group, and is an international video image compression standard. Some DVDs feature di- gital audio compressed and recorded using this system. Multi-angle With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV . Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let- ting you choose your viewing angle as desired. Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi- ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc, letting you choose as desired. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that al- lows additional data to be recorded later . When recording data on a CD -ROM, CD -R or CD-RW , etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses- sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses- sions in one disc. Multi-subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re- corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as desired. Optical digital output/input By transmitting and receiving audio signals in a digital signal format, the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of transmis- sion is minimized. An optical digital output/ input is designed to transmit and receive digi- tal signals optically . Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD -R , etc. at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. Parental lock Some DVD video discs with violent or adult- or- iented scenes feature parental lock which pre- vents children from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you set the unit îÂÂs parental lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these scenes will be skipped. Playback control (PBC) This is a playback control signal recorded on Video CDs (V ersion 2.0). Using menu displays provided by Video CDs with PBC lets you enjoy playback of simple interactive software and software with search functions. Y ou can also enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution still images. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos- sible unless it features the same region num- ber as the DVD player . This unit îÂÂs region number is displayed on the bottom of this unit. Title DVD video discs have high data capacity , en- abling recording of multiple movies on a sin- gle disc. If , for example, one disc contains three separate movies, they are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func- tions. Additional Information En 91 Appendix Additional Information
VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But to flexibly adjust the bit rate according to the needs of audio compression, it is possible to achieve compression priorities sound quality. Additional Information En 92 Appendix
Specifications General P ower source ............................. 1 4 . 4 V D C (10.8 î 15.1 V al- lowable) Grounding system ................... Negative type Head un it: Max. current consu mption ........................................... 1 0 . 0 A Dimensions (W àH àD): DIN Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 0 m m Nose ........................... 1 8 8 à5 8 à3 6 m m D Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 5 m m Nose ........................... 1 7 0 à4 6 à3 1 m m We i gh t ................................ 2 . 2 k g Hideaway unit: Max. current consu mption ........................................... 1 . 0 A Dimensions (W àH àD) ........................................... 1 5 0 à2 8 à1 0 0 m m We i gh t ................................ 0 . 3 k g Display Screen size/asp ect ratio ....... 6 . 5 i nc h w i d e / 1 6 : 9 (effective displ ay area: 146 à79 mm) Pi x e l s ............................................. 336,960 (1,440 à234) T y p e ................................................ T F T active matrix, transmis- sive type Color system .............................. NTSC/P AL compatible Operating temperature range ..................................................... î 10 î 50 ðC Storage temperature range ..................................................... î 20 î 80 ðC Angle adjustment .................... 5 0 î 110ð (initial settings: 110ð) Audio Continuous power output is 22 W per channe l minimum into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 to 15,000 Hz with no more than 5% THD. Maximum power output ....... 5 0 W à4 50 W à2/4 W 7 0WÃÂ1 / 2 W (for subwoofer) Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 î 8 W [2 W for 1 ch] al- lowable) P reout max out put level/output impedance ..................................................... 4 . 0 V / 1 0 0 W Equalizer (3-Band P arametric Equalizer): Low F requency ................ 4 0 / 8 0 / 1 0 0 / 1 6 0 H z Q Fa c t o r .................... 0 . 3 5 / 0 . 5 9 / 0 . 9 5 /1 . 1 5 ( 6 d B when boosted) G a i n ............................ ñ12dB Mid F requency ................ 200/500/1 k/2k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0 . 3 5 / 0 . 5 9 / 0 . 9 5 /1 . 1 5 ( 6 d B when boosted) G a i n ............................ ñ12dB High F requency ................ 3 . 15k/8k/10k/12.5k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0 . 3 5 / 0 . 5 9 / 0 . 9 5 /1 . 1 5 ( 6 d B when boosted) G a i n ............................ ñ12dB Loudness contour L o w ....................................... 3. 5 d B ( 1 0 0 H z ) , 3 d B ( 1 0 kHz) M i d ....................................... 1 0 d B ( 1 0 0 H z ), 6 . 5 d B (10 kHz) H i g h ..................................... 1 1 d B ( 1 00 H z ) , 1 1 d B (10 kHz) (volume: î 30 dB) T one controls: Bass F requency ................ 4 0 / 6 3 / 1 0 0 / 1 6 0 H z G a i n ............................ ñ12dB T reble F requency ................ 2 . 5 k / 4 k / 6 . 3 k / 1 0 k H z G a i n ............................ ñ12dB HPF : F requency .......................... 5 0 / 8 0 / 1 2 5 H z S l o pe .................................... î 12 dB/oct Subwoofer: F requency .......................... 5 0 / 8 0 / 1 2 5 H z S l o pe .................................... î 18 dB/oct G a i n ...................................... ñ12dB Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse DVD Player System .......................................... D V D v ideo, Video CD, Com- pact disc audio system Usable discs .............................. D V D v i deo, Video CD, Com- pact disc Region number: for Sou theast Asian models ........................................... 3 for Sou th American and Oceanian models ........................................... 4 Signal form at: Sampling frequency ..... 4 4 . 1 / 4 8 / 9 6 k H z Additional Information En 93 Appendix Additional Information
Number of quantization bits ........................................... 1 6 / 2 0 / 2 4 ; l i near F requency respo nse ............... 5 î 44,000 Hz (with DVD, at sampling frequenc y 96 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 9 7 d B ( 1 kHz) (IEC -A net- work) (CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IEC -A network)) Dynamic range ......................... 9 5 d B ( 1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB (1 kHz)) Distortion ..................................... 0 . 0 0 8 % ( 1 k H z ) Output level: V i d eo .................................... 1 . 0 V p - p / 7 5 W (ñ0.2 V) Audio ................................... 1 . 0 V ( 1 k H z , 0 d B ) Number of channels .............. 2 ( s t ereo) MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 FM tuner F requency ran ge ...................... 8 7. 5 î 108.0 MHz Usable sensiti vity ..................... 8 d B f ( 0 . 7 õ V / 7 5 W , mono, S/N: 30 dB) 50 dB quieting sensitivity ..... 1 0 d B f ( 0 . 9 õ V / 7 5 W , mono) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 7 5 d B ( I E C - A n e t work) Distortion ..................................... 0 . 3 % ( a t 6 5 d Bf, 1 kHz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz, mono) F requency respo nse ............... 3 0 î 15,00 0 Hz (ñ3 dB) Stereo separatio n .................... 4 5 d B ( at 6 5 d Bf, 1 kHz) AM tuner F requency ran ge ...................... 5 31 î 1,602 kHz (9 kHz ) 530 î 1,640 kHz (10 kHz) Usable sensiti vity ..................... 1 8 õ V ( S / N : 2 0 d B ) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 6 5 d B ( I E C - A n e t work) Infrared remote control W avelength ................................. 9 4 5 n m O u t pu t ........................................... t yp ; 1 0 m w/ s r p e r I n f rared LED Note Specifications and the design are subject to pos- sible modifications without notice due to im- provements. Additional Information En 94 Appendix
A Angle icon ................................................. . 31, . 72 Aspect ratio .............................................. . 72, . 90 Audio language .............................................. . 71 B Brightness ....................................................... . 21 C Chapter ............................................................ . 90 Code number .................................................. . 72 Color ................................................................ . 21 Condition memor y ........................................... .8 Contrast ........................................................... . 21 D Direct search ............................................ . 30, . 35 Dolby Digital ............................................... . 7, . 90 DTS .............................................................. . 7, . 90 H Hue .................................................................. . 21 L Language code chart .................................... . 89 Linear PCM (LPCM) ....................................... . 90 M Menu language .............................................. . 71 MPEG ............................................................... . 91 Multi-angle ................................................ . 31, . 91 Multi-audio ................................................ . 71, . 91 Multi-subtitle .......................... ................... . 70, . 91 O Optical digital output/input .......................... . 91 P P arental lock ............................................. . 72, . 91 PBC (playback control) ................................. . 32 Playback control (PBC) ................................. . 91 R Region number .......................................... . 6, . 91 S Subtitle language ........................................... . 70 T Title .................................................................. . 91 TV aspect ................................ ......................... . 72 V Video CD ........................................................... .6 W Wide screen mode ......................................... . 20 Index En 95
PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU , TOKY O 153-8654, JAP AN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA ) INC. P .O . Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U .S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: (0) 3/570.05 .11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-1111 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY . L TD. 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkwa y , Markham, Ontar io L3R OP2, Canada TEL: (905) 479-4411 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V . Blvd.Manuel Avila Cam acho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico , D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 H àá ý î Pl ø = l ø : ðî î - qî ï î õ 44 _ 13 î û q : (02) 2521-3588 H àû P î - îÂÂî îÂÂPl ø î / æ î U : î / î | c J ë S S 280 _ î L ÿ îÂÂ- à17 î 1704-06 ä û q : (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2003 by Pioneer Cor poration. All r ights reser ved. Printed in Japan <CRB1838-B> RC, RD <KMMZF/03C00000>
Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instruct ions so you will know how to operate your model properly . A fter you have finished read ing the instructio ns, put them away in a safe place for future r eference. Be sure to read this ! Playable discs 6 ! DVD video disc r egion numbers 6 ! When an operation is prohibited 8 Precautions IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS 5 T o ensure safe driving 5 T o avoid batter y exhaustion 5 Before Y ou Start About this unit 6 About this manual 6 P recautions 6 F eatures 7 T o protect the LCD screen 8 F or viewing LCD comfortably 8 Condition memor y 8 What the marks on DVDs indicate 8 Resetting the microprocessor 8 Use and care of the remote control 9 What îÂÂs What Head unit 11 Remote control 13 Basic Operations T urning the unit on and selecting a source 16 Loading a disc 16 Adjusting the volume 17 T urning the unit off 17 Using the rear display 17 T ouch panel key basic operation 18 Opening and closing the LCD panel 19 Changing the wide screen mode 20 Adjusting the picture adjustment 21 P rotecting your unit from theft 22 T uner Listening to the radio 23 Introduction of advanced tuner operation 24 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 24 T uning in strong signals 24 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 25 Playing DVD video discs W atching a DVD video 26 Operating the DVD menu 27 Skipping back or for ward to another title 27 Stopping playback 27 Introduction of advanced DVD video operation 28 Repeating play 28 P ausing DVD video playback 28 F rame-by-frame playback 28 Slow motion playback 29 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time 29 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 30 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 30 Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) 31 Playing Video CDs W atching a Video CD 32 Stopping playback 33 Introduction of advanced Video CD operation 33 Repeating play 33 P ausing Video CD playback 34 Contents En 2
F rame-by-frame playback 34 Slow motion playback 34 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time 35 Selecting audio output 35 Playing CDs Listening a CD 36 Stopping playback 36 Introduction of advanced CD operation 37 Repeating play 37 Playing tracks in a random order 37 Scanning tracks of a CD 37 P ausing CD playback 38 Searching for a desired track 38 Entering disc titles 38 Using CD TEXT functions 39 Playing MP3 Listening MP3 40 Stopping playback 41 Introduction of advanced MP3 operation 41 Repeating play 41 Playing tracks in a random order 42 Scanning folders and tracks 42 P ausing MP3 playback 42 Searching for a desired track in the current folder 43 Displaying text information on MP3 disc 43 Scrolling text information in the display 43 Selecting folders from the folder name list 43 Multi-CD Player Listening a CD 44 50-disc multi-CD player 44 Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 45 Repeating play 45 Playing tracks in a random order 45 Scanning CDs and tracks 46 P ausing CD playback 46 Using ITS playlists 46 Using disc title functions 47 Using CD TEXT functions 48 Using compression and bass emphasis 49 TV tuner W atching the TV tuner 50 Introduction of advanced TV tuner operation 51 Storing and recalling broadcast stations 51 Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 51 Selecting the countr y group 52 DVD Player Playing a disc 53 T urning the DVD player on or off 53 Selecting a disc 54 Introduction of advanced DVD player operation 54 Repeating play 54 P ausing disc playback 55 Playing tracks in a random order 55 Scanning tracks of a CD 55 Using ITS playlists 55 Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments 56 Using balance adjustment 56 Using the equalizer 57 Adjusting bass and treble 58 Adjusting loudness 58 Using subwoofer output 59 Using non fading output 59 Using the high pass filter 59 Adjusting source levels 60 En 3 Contents
Compensating for equalizer cur ves (EQ- EX) 60 Setting the sound focus equalizer (SFEQ) 61 Digital Signal Processor Introduction of DSP adjustments 62 Using the sound field control 62 Using the position selector 63 Using balance adjustment 63 Adjusting source levels 64 Using the dynamic range control 64 Using the dual mono mode 64 Using the direct control 65 Using the Dolby P ro Logic 65 Setting the speaker setting 65 Selecting a cut-off frequency 66 Adjusting the speaker output levels 67 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 67 Adjusting the time alignment 68 Using the equalizer 68 Setting up the DVD player Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 70 Setting the subtitle language 70 Setting the audio language 71 Setting the menu language 71 Setting assist subtitles on or off 71 Setting angle icon display 72 Setting the aspect ratio 72 Setting the parental lock 72 Setting remote control code type 73 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 74 Setting the FM tuning step 74 Setting the AM tuning step 74 Switching the warning tone 75 Switching the auxiliar y setting 75 Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller 75 Correcting distorted sound 76 Switching the sound muting/attenuation 76 Switching the automatic disc playback 76 Switching the dimmer setting for sub- display 77 Other Functions Introduction of setup adjustments 78 Setting the video input 78 Setting for back-up camera 78 Setting the automatic open function 79 Setting the clock 79 Using the AUX source 80 Switching the background display 80 Using the PGM button 81 Additional Information T roubleshooting 82 Error messages 84 DVD player and care 85 DVD discs 85 CD-R/CD-RW discs 85 MP3 files 86 Using the display correctly 87 Language code chart for DVD 89 T erms 90 Specifications 93 Contents En 4
IMPORT ANT SA FEGUARDS Please read all of these instructions regarding your display and retain them for future refer- ence. 1 Read this manual fully and carefully before operating your display . 2 Keep this manual handy for future refer - ence. 3 Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions care- fully . 4 Do not allow other persons to use this sys- tem until they have read and understood the operating instructions. 5 Do not install the display wher e it may (i) obstruct the driver î s vision, (ii) impair the performance of any of the vehicle î s operat- ing systems or safety featur es, including air bags, or (iii) impair the driver î s ability to safely operate the vehicle. 6 As with any accessory in your vehicle î si n - terior , the display should not divert your attention from the safe operation of your vehicle. If you experience dif ficulty in oper - ating the system or r eading the display , please park safely before making adjust- ments. 7 Do not attempt to install or service your display by yourself. Installation or servi- cing of the display by persons without training and experience in electr onic equipment and automo tive accessorie s may be dangerous and could expose you to the risk of electric shock or other ha- zards. 8 Please remember to wear your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled. T o ensure safe driving WARNING ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, this unit is not for use with a video screen that is visible to the driver . ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply , they must be obeyed. This unit detects whther your car îÂÂs parking brake is engaged or not, and prevents you from watching a DVD or TV on this display while driving. When you attempt to watch a DVD or TV , the warning VIDEO VIEWING IS NOT A V AILABLE WHILE DRIVING will appear on the screen. T o watch a DVD or TV on this display, park your car in a safe place and apply the parking brake. When using a display connected to REAR MONITOR OUT This unit î s REAR MONI TOR OUT is for con- nection of a display to enable passengers in the rear seats to watch the DVD or TV . WARNING NEVER install the display in a location that en- ables the driver to watch the DVD or TV while driving. T o avoid battery exhaustion Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using this unit. Using this unit without running the engine can result in batter y drainage. WARNING Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an ACC position. Precautions En 5 Section 01 Precautions
About this unit Playable discs DVD, Video CD and CD discs that display the logos shown below can be played back on this player . DVD video Video CD CD Note It is not possible to play back DVD audio disc. This player can only playback discs bearing the marks shown above. DVD video disc region numbers DVD video discs that have incompatible region numbers cannot be played on this player . The region number of the player can be found on the bottom of this unit. The illustration below shows the regions and corresponding region numbers. About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and op- eration. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanator y . This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit îÂÂs potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. W e recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and obser ve precautions on this page and in other sections. Precautions CA UTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES O THER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HAZARDOUS RADIA TION EXPOSURE. CA UTION: THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and precautio ns. ! Always keep the volume low enough so you can hear sounds outside of the car . ! P rotect this product from moisture. ! If the batter y is disconnected or dis- charged, the preset memor y will be erased and must be reprogrammed. ! If this unit does not operate properly , con- tact your dealer or nearest authorized P io - neer Ser vice Station. Before Y ou Start En 6 Section 02
Features T ouch panel key operation It is possible to operate this unit by using touch panel key . DVD video playback It is possible to play back DVD video, DVD -R (video mode) and DVD -RW (video mode). Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). CD playback Music CD/CD -R/CD-RW playback is possible. MP3 file playback It is possible to play back MP3 files recorded on CD -ROM/CD-R/CD -RW (ISO9660 Level 1/ Level 2 standard recordings). ! Supply of this product only conveys a li- cense for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broad- casting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other net- works or in other electronic content distri- bution systems, such as pay-audio or audio- on-demand applications. An inde- pendent license for such use is required. F or details, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com. NTSC/P AL compatibility This unit is NTSC/P AL system compatible. When connecting other components to this unit, be sure components are compatible with the same video system or else images will not be correctly reproduced. Dolby Digital/DTS compatibility When using this unit with a P ioneer multi- channel processor , you can enjoy the atmo - sphere and excitement provided by DVD movie and music software featuring 5.1channel re- cordings. ! Manufactured under license from Dolby La- boratories. îÂÂDolby î and the double-D sym- bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ! î DTSî is a registered trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Multi-aspect Switching between wide screen, letter box and panscan display is possible. Multi-audio Y ou can switch between multiple audio sys- tems recorded on a DVD as desired. Multi-subtitle Y ou can switch between multiple subtitle lan- guages recorded on a DVD as desired. Multi-angle Y ou can switch between multiple viewing an- gles of a scene recorded on a DVD as desired. Note This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual prop- erty rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Before Y ou Start En 7 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
T o protect the LCD screen ! Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the display when this unit is not being used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in LCD screen malfunction due to the resulting high temperatures. ! When using a portable phone, keep the an- tenna of the portable phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. For viewing LCD comfortably Due to its construction, the view angle of the LCD screen is limited. The viewing angle (verti- cal and horizontal) can be increased, however , by using BRIGHT to adjust the black density of the video. When using for the first time, adjust the black density in accordance with the view- ing angle (vertical and horizontal) to adjust for clear viewi ng. DIMMER can also be used to adjust the brightness of the LCD screen itself to suit your personal preference. Condition memory This function memorizes audio language, sub- title language, angle number and aspect ratio made during disc playback for up to 30 discs. Without any special operations, the final set- ting details during playback of a disc are mem- orized. The next time a disc is played, the previous settings are automatically applied. ! With some discs, audio language and sub- title language are automatically specified, in which case condition memor y does not function. ! When the number of discs exceeds 30, set- tings for the latest disc replace those for the least recent disc. What the marks on DVDs indicate The marks below may be found on DVD disc labels and packages. They indicate the type of images and audio recorded on the disc, and the functions you can use. Mark Meaning 2 Indicates the numbe r of audio sys- tems. 2 Indicates the numbe r of subtitle lan- guages. 3 Indicates the numbe r of viewing an- gles. 16 : 9 LB Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio: screen width-to-height ratio) type. 3 4 ALL Indicates the numbe r of the region where playback is possible. When an operation is prohibited When you are watching a DVD and attempt to per form an operation, it may not be per formed by the programming on the disc. When this happens, this unit indicates the icon on the screen. ! The icon may not appear in certain dis- cs. Resetting the micropr ocessor P ressing RESET lets you reset the micropro- cessor to its initial settings without changing the condition memor y . The microprocessor must be reset under the following conditions: ! P rior to using this unit for the first time after installation ! If the unit fails to operate properly Before Y ou Start En 8 Section 02
! When strange or incorrect messages ap- pear on the display 1 T ur n the ignition switch OFF . 2 Press RESET with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. RESET button Note After completing connections or when you want to erase all memorized settings or return the unit to its initial (factor y) settings, switch your engine ON or set the ignition switch to ACC ON before pressing RESET . Use and care of the r emote control Installing the battery Slide the tray out on the back of the remote control and insert the batter y with the plus ( ) and minus ( îÂÂ) poles pointing in the proper di- rection. ! When using for the first time, pull out the film protruding from the tray . WARNING Keep the batter y out of the reach of children. Should the batter y be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor . CAUTION ! Use only one CR2025 (3 V) lithium batter y . ! Remove the batter y if the remote control is not used for a month or longer . ! Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or dispose of the batter y in fire. ! Do not handle the batter y with metallic tools. ! Do not store the batter y with metallic materi- als. ! In the event of batter y leakage, wipe the re- mote control completely clean and install a new batter y . ! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or en- vironmental public institution îÂÂs rules that apply in your countr y/area. Before Y ou Start En 9 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Using the remote control P oint the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. ! The remote control may not function prop- erly in direct sunlight. Important ! Do not store the remote control in high tem- peratures or direct sunlight. ! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor , where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. Before Y ou Start En 10 Section 02
Head unit 1 DISPLA Y button P ress to select different displays. 2 PGM button P ress to operate the preprogrammed func- tions for each source. (Refer to Using the PGM button on page 81.) 3 Ambient light sensor Senses ambient light. This system automati- cally adjusts the brightness of the display to compensate for ambient light. 4 FLIP DOWN/CLOCK button P ress to turn the LCD panel horizontal tem- porarily when the LCD panel is upright. P ress to turn the clock display on or off when the LCD panel is closed. 5 OPEN/CLOSE button P ress to open or close the LCD panel. 6 ENTERT AINMENT button P ress to switch between the background displays. 7 WIDE button P ress to select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. 8 MENU button P ress and hold to display the picture adjust- ment menu. 9 RESET button P ress to return to the factor y settings (initial settings). a DET ACH button P ress to remove the front panel from the head unit. b EJECT button P ress to eject a disc from this unit. 1 2 4 5 3 6 7 a c d e f g h i l k 9 j 8 b What î s What En 11 Section 03 What î s What
c Joystick Move to do manual seek tuning, fast for- ward, reverse and track search controls. Also used for controlling functions. d EQ button P ress to select various equalizer cur ves. e BAND/ESC button P ress to select among three FM and one AM bands and cancel the control mode of functions. f ANGLE ( / î ) button P ress to change the LCD panel angle. g A TT button P ress to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. P ress once more to return to the original volume level. h BACK button P ress to return to the previous display . i REAR ON button P ress to watch a DVD/Video CD on a rear display if DVD (built-in DVD player) is not selected as the source. j Disc loading slot Insert a disc to play . k SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all of the available sources. l VOLUME Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. What î s What En 12 Section 03
Remote control 1 Remote control selection switch Switch to change the setting of the remote control. For details, refer to Setting remote control code type on page 73. 2 VOLUME button P ress to increase or decrease the volume. 3 REAR.S button P ress to watch a DVD/Video CD on a rear display if DVD (built-in DVD player) is not selected as the source. 4 SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all of the available sources. 5 Joystick Move to do manual seek tuning, fast for- ward, reverse and track search controls. Also used for controlling functions. 6 Remote control operation mode switch Switch the operation mode between AV H , DVD and TV modes. Normally, set to AV H . ! AV H î For common operation of this unit ! DVD î Only for DVD player operation ! TV î Only for TV tuner operation F or details, refer to Switching the r emote control operation mode switch on the next page. 7 BACK button P ress to return to the previous display . 8 BAND/ESC button P ress to select among three FM and one AM bands and cancel the control mode of functions. 9 ENTERT AINMENT button P ress to switch between the background displays. 5 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 a b d e c f g i k m o p h What î s What En 13 Section 03 What î s What
a FORW ARD ( n) button P ress to per form fast for ward playback. b STOP ( g ) button P ress to stop playback. c NEXT ( p ) button P ress to go to the next track (chapter). d CLEAR button P ress to cancel the input number while 0 î 10 are used. e 0 î 10 buttons P ress to directly select the desired track, preset tuning and disc. 1 îÂÂ6 buttons can op- erate the preset tuning for the tuner or disc number search for the multi-CD player . f PREVIOUS ( o ) button P ress to return to the previous track (chap- ter). g REVERSE ( m ) button P ress to per form fast reverse playback. h PLA Y/P AUSE ( f) button P ress to switch sequentially between play- back and pause play. i ANGLE button P ress to change the viewing angle during DVD playback. j STEP ( r /q ) button P ress to move ahead one frame at a time during DVD/VideoCD playback. Press and hold for one second to activate slow play- back. k SUBTITLE (SUB.T) button P ress to change the subtitle language dur- ing DVD playback. l DISPLA Y button P ress to select different displays. m AUDIO button P ress to change the audio language during DVD playback. n RETURN button P ress to display the PBC (playback control) menu during PBC playback. o MENU button P ress to display the DVD menu during DVD playback. p TOP MENU (TOP .M) button P ress to return to the top menu during DVD playback. Switching the remote control operation mode switch There are three remote control operation modes on the remote control. AV H mode operation When operating this unit by remote control, normally switch the mode to AV H . ! The joystick on the remote control can per- form the same operations as it on the head unit. F urthermore, the joystick can per form the same operations as the touch panel keys a , b , c and d . ! 1 îÂÂ6 can per form the same operations as the preset tuning keys P1 î P6 and the disc selection keys 01 îÂÂ06 . î If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12 by using 1 îÂÂ6, press and hold the corresponding numbers such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number appears in the display . What î s What En 14 Section 03
DVD mode operation If you switch the mode to DVD, the joystick and 0 î 10 operations are changed for DVD player . % When you want to operate the follow- ing functions, switch the mode to DVD: ! When operating the DVD menu by using the joystick. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 27.) ! When operating the PBC menu by using 0 î 10 . (Refer to Watching a Video CD on page 32.) ! When specifying title or track by using 0 î 10 . (Refer to Specifying title on page 30 and Specifying track on page 35.) Note When switching the mode to DVD, you cannot use these buttons; BACK , ENTERT AINMENT and DISPLA Y . TV mode operation If you use the rear output on TV tuner , you can watch the TV picture on the rear display inde- pendently . T o operate the TV on the rear dis- play independently, switch the mode to TV .I n this case, the joystick operation is changed for TV . ! F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner îÂÂs operation manuals. % When you want to operate the follow- ing functions only on the rear display , switch the mode to TV: ! When per forming manual or seek tuning by moving the joystick left or right. ! When recalling preset stations by moving the joystick up or down. ! When selecting the countr y group by click- ing joystick and then moving it left or right. (This function can be operated only when connecting a TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P6450TVP) featuring the countr y setting.) Note When switching the mode to TV, you cannot use except the joystick, SOURCE and VOLUME . What î s What En 15 Section 03 What î s What
T urning the unit on and selecting a source 1 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. Y ou can select a source you want to listen to. If DVD AUTO is turned on, load a disc in this unit to switch to DVD (refer to Switching the automatic disc playback on page 76). % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. The source names are displayed and select- able ones are highlighted. ! DVD î Built-in DVD player ! S-DVD î DVD player/multi-DVD player ! M-CD î Multi-CD player ! TUNER î T uner ! TV î T elevision ! AV î Video input ! EXT -1 î External unit 1 ! EXT -2 î External unit 2 ! AUX î AUX ! SOURCE OFF î T urn the unit off # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . % When using the button, press SOURCE to select a source. P ress SOURCE repeatedly to switch between the following sources: TUNER (tuner) î TV (television) î AV (video input) î DVD (built-in DVD player) î S-DVD (DVD player/multi-DVD player) î M-CD (multi- CD player) î EXT -1 (external unit 1) î EXT -2 (external unit 2) î AUX (AUX) Notes ! In the following cases, the sound source will not change: î When a unit corresponding to each source is not connected to this unit. î When no disc is set in this unit. î When no disc is set in the DVD player . î When no magazine is set in the multi-CD player . î When no magazine is set in the multi-DVD player . î When the AUX (auxiliar y input) is set to off (refer to page 75). î When the AV (video input) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 78). ! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions by this unit. T wo external units can be controlled by this unit. When two exter- nal units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this unit. ! When this unit î s blue/white lead is connected to the car îÂÂs auto-antenna relay control term- inal, the car îÂÂs antenna extends when this unit îÂÂs source is turned on. T o retract the an- tenna, turn the source off . Loading a disc % Insert a disc into the disc loading slot. Playback will automatically start. # If DVD AUTO is turned off , touch the source icon and then touch DVD to select DVD (refer to this page). Basic Operations En 16 Section 04
# When a disc is loaded in this unit, touch the source icon and then touch DVD to select DVD . # T o eject a disc, press EJECT . Notes ! The DVD player plays one, standard, 12-cm or 8-cm (single) disc at a time. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm discs. ! Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Discs which can be played back are listed on Playable discs on page 6. ! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play , check that the label side of the disc is up. P ress EJECT to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before inserting the disc again. ! If the DVD player does not operate properly , an error message such as ERROR-11 may be displayed. Refer to Err or messages on page 84. Adjusting the volume % Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. With the head unit, rotate VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. With the remote control, press VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. T urning the unit off % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch SOURCE OFF. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. % When using the button, press SOURCE and hold until the unit tur ns off. Using the rear display Y ou can watch a DVD/Video CD on the rear display regardless of whether DVD (built-in DVD player) is selected as the source or not. ! If you watch a DVD/Video CD on the rear display only, switch the operation mode on the remote control to DVD. And you can operate the DVD/Video CD playback on the rear display independently by the remote control. (Refer to page 14.) CAUTION When you have turned the DVD/Video CD play- back on by pressing REAR ON, you cannot turn it off even if you press SOURCE and hold. In this case, press REAR ON to turn the DVD/Video CD playback off . % Press REAR ON to watch a DVD/Video CD on the rear display when DVD (built-in DVD player) is not selected as the source. DVD/Video CD playback is turned on and the illumination color of REAR ON changes into the different color than the other buttons. # Y ou can also turn the DVD/Video CD playback on by pressing REAR.S on the remote contorol. # T o turn the DVD/Video CD playback off , press REAR ON again. Basic Operations En 17 Section 04 Basic Operations
T ouch panel key basic operation Activating the touch panel keys 1 1 T ouch panel keys T ouch to do various operations. 1 T ouch the screen to activate the touch panel keys corresponding to each source. The touch panel keys appear on the display. # T o go to the next group of touch panel keys, touch d . 2 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. # Y ou can also hide the touch panel keys by pressing BAND/ESC . Note If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 sec- onds, they will be hidden automatically . Operating the menu 1 4 5 2 3 1 FUNCTION key T ouch to select functions for each source. 2 AUDIO key T ouch to select various sound quality con- trols. 3 SETUP key T ouch to select various setup functions. 4 BACK key T ouch to return to the previous display. 5 ESC key T ouch to cancel the control mode of func- tions. 1 T ouch A.MENU to display MENU . MENU appears on the display . # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the desired key to display the function names you want to operate. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . 3 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. Basic Operations En 18 Section 04
Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Operating the menu by using the joystick Y ou can also per form most of the menu items by using the joystick. ! Switch the remote control operation mode to AV H to operate the menu by using the joystick on the remote contro l. (Refer to page 14.) 1 Click the joystick during display of each source to display MENU . MENU appears on the display . 2 Move the joystick up or down and then click it to display the function names you want to operate. # T o go to the next group of function names, move the joystick to NEXT and click it. # T o return to the previous group of function names, move the joystick to PREV and click it. 3 Press BAND/ESC to re turn to the display of each source. # Y ou can return to the previous display by pressing BACK . Opening and closing the LCD panel The LCD panel will be opened or closed auto- matically with the turning of the ignition switch on or off . Y ou can turn off the automatic close/open function. (Refer to page 79.) ! The automatic close/open function will op- erate the display as follows. î When the ignition switch is turned OFF while the LCD panel is opened, the LCD panel will close aft er six seconds. î When the ignition switch is turned ON again (or turned to ACC), the LCD panel will be opened automaticall y . î Removing or attaching the front panel will automatically close or open the LCD panel. (Refer to page 22.) ! When the ignition switch is turned OFF after the LCD panel has been closed, turn- ing the ignition switch ON again (or turning it to ACC) will not open the LCD panel. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE to open the LCD panel. ! When closing the LCD panel, check to make sure that it has closed completely . If the LCD panel has stopped halfwa y , leaving it like this could result in damage. % Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the LCD panel. # T o close the LCD panel, press OPEN/CLOSE again. Adjusting the LCD panel angle Important ! If you can hear the LCD panel knocking against your vehicle îÂÂs console or dashboard, press ANGLE ( î ) to move the LCD panel a lit- tle for ward. ! When adjusting the LCD panel angle, be sure to press ANGLE ( / î ). F orcibly adjusting the LCD panel by hand may damage it. % Press ANGLE ( / î ) to adjust the LCD panel to an easily viewable angle. The LCD panel angle continues changing as long as you press ANGLE ( / î ) and hold. Basic Operations En 19 Section 04 Basic Operations
# The adjusted the LCD panel angle will be memorized and automatically returned to the next time the LCD panel is opened. T ur ning the LCD pane l horizontal When the LCD panel is upright and it hinders the operation of the air conditioner , the posi- tion of the panel can be turned horizontal tem- porarily . % Press FLIP DOWN/CLOCK to turn the LCD panel horizontal. # T o return to original position, press FLIP DOWN /CLOCK again . # The LCD panel returns to the original position automatically with beep sounds 10 seconds af ter operation. Changing the wide screen mode Y ou can select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. % Press WIDE to select the desired set- ting. P ress WIDE repeatedly to switch between the following settings: FULL (full) î JUST (just) î CINEMA (cinema) î ZOOM (zoom)î NORMAL (normal) FULL (full) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direc- tion only , enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 TV picture (normal picture) without any omissions. JUST (just) The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and the amount of enlargement increases horizontally to the ends, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without sensing any disparity even on a wide screen. CINEMA (cinema) A picture is enlarged by the same proportion as FULL or ZOOM in the horizontal direction and by an intermediate proportion between FULL and ZOOM in the vertical direction; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture) where cap- tions lie outside. ZOOM (zoom) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion both vertically and horizontally ; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture). NORMAL (normal) A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no sense of disparity since its proportions are the same as that of the normal picture. Notes ! Different settings can be memorized for each video source. ! When video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original aspect ratio, it may appear differently . ! Remember that using the wide mode feature of this system for commercial or public view- ing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author îÂÂs rights protected by the Copy- right Law . ! Video will appear grainy when viewed in CINEMA or ZOOM mode. ! The backup camera picture is always FULL . Basic Operations En 20 Section 04
Adjusting the picture adjustment Y ou can adjust BRIGHT (brightness), CONTRAST (contrast), COLOR (color) and HUE (hue) for each source and back-up cam- era. ! The adjustments of BRIGHT and CONTRAST are stored separately for light ambient (daytime) and dark ambient (night- time). A sun or moon is displayed to the lef t of BRIGHT and CONTRAST, respec- tively , as the ambient light sensor deter- mines brightness or darkness. ! Y ou cannot adjust HUE for P AL video. ! Y ou cannot adjust COLOR and HUE for the audio source. 1 Press MENU on the head unit and hold to display PICTURE ADJUST . P ress MENU until PICTURE ADJUST appears in the display . # Y ou cannot use MENU on the remote control. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the function to be adjusted. The adjustment function names are displayed and adjustable ones are highlighted. ! BRIGHT î Adjust the black intensity ! CONTRAST î Adjust the contrast ! COLOR î Adjust the color saturation ! HUE î Adjust the tone of color (red is em- phasized or green is emphasized) ! DIMMER î Adjust the brightness of display ! BACK-CAMERA î Switch to the picture ad- justment display for the back-up camera ! SOURCE î Return to the picture adjustment display for each source # Y ou can adjust the picture adjustment for back-up camera only when B-CAMERA is turned on. (Refer to Setting for back-up camera on page 78.) # With some back-up camera, the picture ad- justment may not be able to use. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the selected item. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the level of selected item. 24 î îÂÂ24 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. 4 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Adjusting the dimmer The adjustment of DIMMER is stored sepa- rately for each ambient light; daytime, evening and nighttime. The brightness of LCD screen will be adjusted optimum level autom atically in accordance with the ambient light based on the setting values. 1 Press MENU on the head unit and hold to display PICTURE ADJUST . P ress MENU until PICTURE ADJUST appears in the display . 2 T ouch DIMMER. The ambient light level used as the standard for adjusting DIMMER appears above the level bar . ! Y ellow sun î Adjust the brightness for bright ambient light (daytime) ! Red sun î Adjust the brightness for in- termediate brightness (evening) ! Blue moon î Adjust the brightness for dark ambient light (nighttime) 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the brightness. Each time you touch c or d moves yellow to - wards the left or the right. The level indicates the brightness of the screen being adjusted. The farther yellow moves to the right, the brighter the screen. 4 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Basic Operations En 21 Section 04 Basic Operations
Note The icons indicating the current ambient bright- ness used for adjusting BRIGHT and CONTRAST may differ from DIMMER slightly . Protecting your unit fr om theft The front panel can be detached from the head unit to discourage theft. ! If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turni ng off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. ! Y ou can turn off the warning tone. See Switching the warning tone on page 75. Important ! Never use force or grip the display and the buttons tightly when removing or attaching. ! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks. ! Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. ! Attach the front panel while driving, or else may result in scratching or damage. Removing the front panel 1 Press DET ACH to remove the front panel. P ress DET ACH and the right side of the front panel is removed from the head unit. 2 Grip the right side of the front panel and pull it gently outward. T ake care not to grip it tightly or to drop it. Attaching the front panel % Replace the front panel by holding it upright to this unit and clipping it securely into the mounting hooks. Basic Operations En 22 Section 04
Listening to the radio 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 These are the basic steps necessar y to operate the radio. More advanced tuner operation is explained starting on the next page. Important If you are using this unit in North, Central or South America, reset the AM tuning step (see Setting the AM tuning step on page 74). 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to, AM or FM. 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected. 4 Frequency indicator Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned. 5 Preset list display Shows the preset list. 6 STEREO indicator Shows that the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo. 7 LOCAL indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch TUNER to select the tuner . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired band is displayed, FM1 , FM2, FM3 for FM or AM . 4 T o perform manual tuning, touch c or d shortly . The frequencies move up or down step by step. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by mov- ing the joystick left or right. 5 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by touching either c or d shortly . # If you keep touching c or d you can skip broadcasting stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys. # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by holding the joystick left or right. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 sec- onds, they will be hidden automatically . T uner En 23 Section 05 T uner
Introduction of advanced tuner operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the frequency display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the frequency display . Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1 î P6 you can easily store up to six broad- cast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a key . % When you find a fr equency that you want to store in memory keep touching a preset tuning key P 1 îÂÂP 6 until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have touched will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memor y . The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key P1 î P6 the radio station frequency is recalled from memor y . # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. # When P1 î P6 are not displayed, you can dis- play them by touching DISP . Notes ! Up to 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the three FM bands, and 6 AM stations can be stored in memor y . ! Y ou can also use a and b to recall radio sta- tion frequencies assigned to preset tuning keys P1 î P6 . ! Y ou can also per form the same operations using P . CH MEMO . T o display P . CH MEMO , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . T uning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch LOCAL. 2 T ouch a to turn local seek tuning on. # T o turn local seek tuning off , touch b . T uner En 24 Section 05
3 T ouch c or d to set the sensitivity . There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for AM: FM: 1 î 2 î 3 î 4 AM: 1 î 2 The 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memor y) lets you automa- tically store the six strongest broadcast fre- quencies under preset tuning keys P1 î P6 and once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a key . 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch BSM. 2 T ouch a to turn BSM on. BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 î P6 in order of their signal strength. When finished, BSM stops flashing. # T o cancel the storage process, touch b . Note Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may re- place broadcast frequencies you have saved using P1 î P6 . T uner En 25 Section 05 T uner
W atching a DVD video 1 3 4 5 6 2 7 8 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a DVD video with your DVD player . More ad- vanced DVD video operation is explained start- ing on page 28. 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 DVD-V indicator Shows when a DVD video is playing. 3 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing. 4 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent chapter . 6 Viewing angle indicator Shows what viewing angle has been se- lected. 7 Subtitle language indicator Shows what subtitle language has been se- lected. 8 Audio language indicator Shows what audio language has been se- lected. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # If no disc is loaded in this unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in this unit. (Refer to page 16.) # With some discs, a menu may be displayed. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on the next page.) 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another chapter , touch o or p . T ouching p skips to the start of the next chapter . T ouching o once skips to the start of the current chapter . T ouching again will skip to the previous chapter . Chapter numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another chapter by moving the joystick left or right. 4 T ouch d to display m and n . T ouch d until m and n appear in the dis- play . 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching m or n . If you keep touching m or n for five sec- onds, the icon m or n changes into rever- sal indication. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you re- lease m or n. T o resume playback at a de- sired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by holding the joystick left or right. Playing DVD video discs En 26 Section 06
# F ast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Notes ! Y ou can display the repeat range selected cur- rently by touching DISP . ! If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Operating the DVD menu Some DVDs allow you to select the disc con- tents using a menu. ! Y ou can display the menu by touching MENU or TOP .M while a disc is playing. T ouching either of these keys again lets you start playback from the location selected from the menu. For details, refer to the in- structions provided with the disc. 1 T ouch î î î to display touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu. # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. 2 T ouch a , b , c or d to select the desired menu item. 3 T ouch ENTER. Playback starts from the selected menu item. # If you switch the remote control operation mode to DVD, the joystick on the remote control can also operate the DVD menu. (Refer to page 14.) # Y ou cannot operate the DVD menu by the joy- stick on the head unit. # The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. Skipping back or forward to another title % T o skip back or forward to another title, touch a or b . T ouching a skips to the start of the next title. T ouching b skips to the start of the previous title. Title numbers are displayed for eight seconds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another title by moving the joystick up or down. Stopping playback % T ouch g . # When you stop DVD playback by touching g , that location on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Playing DVD video discs En 27 Section 06 Playing DVD video discs
Introduction of advanced DVD video operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play There are two repeat play ranges for the DVD playback: TITILE (title repeat) and CHAPTER (chapter repeat). 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch REPEA T. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the repeat range. ! TITILE î Repeat just the current title ! CHAPTER î Repeat just the current chapter ! REPEA T OFF î Play throughout the current disc Note If you per form chapter search or fast for ward/re- verse, the repeat play range changes to REPEA T OFF . Pausing DVD video playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f during playback. The icon e is displayed for four seconds and playback is paused letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Notes ! Y ou can also turn on or off pause function using P AUSE . T o display P AUSE , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed indicating that still playback is not possi- ble. Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. Playing DVD video discs En 28 Section 06
% T ouch r during playback. Each time you touch r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . Notes ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Keep touching r until î î is displayed during playback. The icon î î is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . 2 Press q or r to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you press q or r changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 î 1/8 î 1/4 î 1/2 Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi- ble. Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time Y ou can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a title or chapter , and the time search function to specify the time on a disc at which play starts. ! Chapter search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH and then touch TITLE (title), CHAP . (chapter) or TIME (time). 2 T ouch 0 îÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . For titles and chapters ! T o select 3, touch 3 . ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order . For time (time search) ! T o select 21 minutes 43 seconds, touch 2 , 1 , 4 and 3 in order . ! T o select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7 , 1 , 0 and 0 in order . # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C . # Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . 3 While the input number is displayed, touch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected scene. Notes ! Y ou can also per form the same operations using SEARCH. T o display SEARCH , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . ! With discs featuring a menu, you can also touch MENU or TOP .M and then make selec- tions from the displayed menu. Playing DVD video discs En 29 Section 06 Playing DVD video discs
! With some discs, the icon may be dis- played, indicating that titles, chapters and time cannot be specified. Specifying title Y ou can use the direct search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a title. ! Only the remote control can operate this function. T o per form this function, switch the remote control operation mode to DVD . (Refer to page 14.) % Press 0 î 10 corre sponding to a desired title number when the disc is stopped. Title number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected title. ! T o select 3, press 3 . ! T o select 10, press 10 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, press 10 , 10 and 3 in order . Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) DVDs can provide audio playback with differ- ent languages and different systems (Dolby Di- gital, DTS etc.). With DVDs featuring multi- audio recordings, you can switch between lan- guages/audio systems during playback. % T ouch AUDIO during playback. Each time you touch AUDIO switches be- tween audio. Notes ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD îÂÂs pack- age indicates the number of recorded lan- guages/audio systems. ! With some DVDs, switching between lan- guages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using DVD SETUP. For details, refer to Setting the audio language on page 71. ! Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If this unit îÂÂs optical digital outputs are not con- nected, DTS audio will not be output, so select an audio setting other than DTS. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated. ! T ouching AUDIO during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. % T ouch SUB.T during playback. Each time you touch SUB.T switches between subtitle language. Notes ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD îÂÂs pack- age indicates the number of recorded subtitle languages. ! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using DVD SETUP . F or details, refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 70. ! T ouching SUB.T during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Playing DVD video discs En 30 Section 06
Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch among viewing angles during play- back. ! During playback of a scene shot from mul- tiple angles on this unit, the angle icon is displayed. T urn angle icon display on or off using DVD SETUP. For details, refer to Setting angle icon display on page 72. % T ouch ANGLE during playback of a scene shot from multiple angles. Each time you touch ANGLE switches be- tween angle. Notes ! The 3 mark on a DVD îÂÂs package indicates it features multi-angle scenes. The number in the 3 mark indicates the number of angles from which scenes were shot. ! T ouching ANGLE during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Playing DVD video discs En 31 Section 06 Playing DVD video discs
W atching a Video CD 1 3 4 2 5 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a Video CD with your DVD player . More ad- vanced Video CD operation is explained start- ing on the next page. 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 V -CD indicator Shows when a Video CD is playing. 3 T rack number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 5 Audio output indicator Shows the output channel selected cur- rently . 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # If no disc is loaded in this unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in this unit. (Refer to page 16.) # With a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function, a menu is displayed. 2 Switch the remote control operation mode to DVD and then press 0 îÂÂ10 to select the desir ed menu item. Playback starts from the selected menu item. # When the menu is two or more pages long, touch o or p to switch between displays. # Y ou can play a disc without using a menu (without PBC playback). (Refer to Sear ching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time on page 35.) T o return to PBC playback, stop playback and touch f . # Y ou can display the menu by pressing RETURN during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. # After operating the menu, we recommend that you switch remote control operation mode to AV H . (Refer to page 14.) 3 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 4 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p . T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching again will skip to the previous track. T rack numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick left or right. # During PBC playback, a menu may be dis- played if you per form these operations. 5 T ouch d to display m and n . T ouch d until m and n appear in the dis- play . 6 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching m or n . If you keep touching m or n for five sec- onds, the icon m or n changes into rever- Playing Video CDs En 32 Section 07
sal indication. When this happens, fast re- verse/fast for ward continues even if you re- lease m or n. T o resume playback at a desired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by holding the joystick left or right. # F ast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 sec- onds, they will be hidden automatically . Stopping playback % T ouch g . # When you stop Video CD playback (during PBC playback only) by touching g, that location on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Introduction of advanced Video CD operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play There are two repeat play ranges for the Video CD playback: TRACK (track repeat) and DISC (disc repeat). Playing Video CDs En 33 Section 07 Playing Video CDs
! During PBC playback of Video CDs, this function cannot be operated. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch REPEA T. 2 T ouch either of the following touch panel keys to select the repeat range. ! TRACK î Repeat just the current track ! DISC î Repeat the current disc Note If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, the repeat play range changes to DISC . Pausing Video CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f during playback. The icon e is displayed for four seconds and playback is paused letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Notes ! Y ou can also turn on or off pause function using P AUSE . T o display P AUSE , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed indicating that still playback is not possi- ble. Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % T ouch r during playback. Each time you touch r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . Notes ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Keep touching r until î î is displayed during playback. The icon î î is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . 2 Press q or r to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you press q or r changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 î 1/8 î 1/4 î 1/2 Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi- ble. Playing Video CDs En 34 Section 07
Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time Y ou can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a track, and the time search function to specify the time on a disc at which play starts. ! During PBC playback of Video CDs, this function cannot be operated. ! Time search is not possible when disc play- back has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH and then touch TRACK (track) or TIME (time). 2 T ouch 0 îÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . For tracks ! T o select 3, touch 3 . ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order . For time (time search) ! T o select 21 minutes 43 seconds, touch 2 , 1 , 4 and 3 in order . ! T o select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7 , 1 , 0 and 0 in order . # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C . # Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . 3 While the input number is displayed, touch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected scene. Note Y ou can also per form the same operations using SEARCH . T o display SEARCH , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . Specifying track Y ou can use the direct search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a track. ! Only the remote control can operate this function. T o per form this function, switch the remote control operation mode to DVD . (Refer to page 14.) ! During PBC playback of Video CDs, this function cannot be operated. % Press 0 î 10 corre sponding to a desired track number when the disc is stopped. T rack number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected track. ! T o select 3, press 3 . ! T o select 10, press 10 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, press 10 , 10 and 3 in order . Note With some discs, the icon may be displayed and operation may not be possible. Selecting audio output Y ou can switch between stereo and monaural audio output. % Press AUDIO during playback. P ress AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following outputs: L R (left and right channels) î L (left channel) î R (right channel) Note Y ou can also per form the same operations using L/R SELECT . T o display L/R SELECT , touch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NEXT . Playing Video CDs En 35 Section 07 Playing Video CDs
Listening a CD 1 3 4 2 6 5 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your DVD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 CD indicator Shows when a CD is playing. 3 T rack number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 5 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing disc. 6 Repeat indicator Shows the selected repeat range. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # If no disc is loaded in this unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in this unit. (Refer to page 16.) 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p . T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching again will skip to the previous track. T rack numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick left or right. 4 T ouch d to display m and n . T ouch d until m and n appear in the dis- play . 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching m or n . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by holding the joystick left or right. Notes ! When playing discs with MP3 files and audio data (CD -DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED- MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA by touching DA÷MP3 or pressing BAND/ESC . ! If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Stopping playback % T ouch g . # When you stop CD playback by touching g , that location on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Playing CDs En 36 Section 08
Introduction of advanced CD operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch REPEA T. 2 T ouch either of the following touch panel keys to select the repeat range. ! TRACK î Repeat just the current track ! DISC î Repeat the current disc Notes ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. ! When playing discs with MP3 files and audio data (CD -DA), repeat play per forms within the currently playing data type even if DISC is selected. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order . 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch RANDOM. 2 T ouch a to turn random play on. T racks will play in a random order . # T o turn random play off , touch b . Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch SCAN. 2 T ouch a to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 3 When you find the desir ed track touch b to turn scan play off. Playing CDs En 37 Section 08 Playing CDs
Note After scanning of a CD is finished, normal play- back of the tracks will begin again. Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f during playback. The icon e is displayed for four seconds and playback is paused. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Note Y ou can also turn on or off pause function using P AUSE . T o display P AUSE , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . Searching for a desired track Y ou can use the search function to specify a track to search for a desired track. 1 T ouch SEARCH and then touch TRACK. 2 T ouch 0 îÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . ! T o select 3, touch 3 . ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order . # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C . # Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . 3 While the input number is displayed, touch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected track. Note Y ou can also per form the same operations using SEARCH . T o display SEARCH , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . Entering disc titles Y ou can input CD titles and display the title. The next time you insert a CD for which you have entered a title, the title of that CD will be displayed. Disc title input lets you input CD titles up to 10 letters long and up to 48 disc titles into this unit. ! When playing a CD TEXT disc, you cannot switch to TITLE EDIT . The disc title will have already been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. ! If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, NO TITLE is displayed. 1 Play a CD that you want to enter the title. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NEXT. 3 T ouch TITLE EDIT. 4 T ouch ABC to select the desired charac- ter type. T ouch ABC repeatedly to switch between the following character type: Alphabet (upper case), numbers and symbols î Alphabet (lower case) # Y ou can select to input numbers and symbols by touching 123 . 5 T ouch a or b to select a letter of the al- phabet. Each time you touch a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C ... X Y Z , numbers and symbols in 1 2 3 ... | } ï order . Each time you Playing CDs En 38 Section 08
touch b will display a letter in the reverse order , such as Z Y X ... C B A order . 6 T ouch d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the desired letter is displayed, touch d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . T ouch c to move backwards in the display. 7 T ouch OK to store the entered title in memory . 8 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . Notes ! Titles remain in memor y , even af ter the disc has been removed from this unit, and are re- called when the disc is reinserted. ! After data for 48 discs has been stored in memor y , data for a new disc will over write the oldest one. Using CD TEXT functions Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist îÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these spe- cially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below . Displaying titles on CD TEXT dis cs % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: DiscTitle (disc title) î DiscArtist (disc artist name) î T rackTitle (track title) î T .Artist (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO ART IST ). Scrolling titles in the display This unit can display the first 19 letters only of DiscTitle , DiscArtist , T rackTitle and T .Artist . When the recorded information is longer than 19 letters, you can scroll the text to the lef t so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Keep touching DISP until the title be- gins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the display . Selecting tracks from the track title list T rack title list lets you see the list of track titles on a CD TEXT disc and select one of them to playback. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch TRACK LIST. 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT to switch between the lists of titles. 3 T ouch your favorite track title. That selection will begin to play . Playing CDs En 39 Section 08 Playing CDs
Listening MP3 1 4 5 2 7 3 6 These are the basic steps necessar y to play an MP3 with your DVD player . More advanced MP3 operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 MP3 indicator Shows when the MP3 file is playing. 3 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. 4 T rack number indicator Shows the track (file) currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track (file). 6 Folder name indicator Shows the folder name currently playing. 7 Repeat indicator Shows the selected repeat range. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # If no disc is loaded in this unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in this unit. (Refer to page 16.) 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p . T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching again will skip to the previous track. T rack numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick left or right. 4 T ouch d to display a , b , m and n . T ouch d until a, b, m and n appear in the display . 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching m or n . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by holding the joystick left or right. # There is no sound on fast for ward or reverse. # This is fast for ward and reverse operation only for the file being played. This operation is can- celed when the previous or next file is reached. 6 T ouch a or b to select a folder . # Y ou can also select a folder by moving the joy- stick up or down. # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND/ESC . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have an MP3 file recorded in it. Playing MP3 En 40 Section 09
Notes ! When playing discs with MP3 files and audio data (CD -DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED- MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA by touching DA÷MP3 or pressing BAND/ESC . ! If you have switched between playback of MP3 files and audio data (CD -DA), playback starts at the first track on the disc. ! This DVD player can play back an MP3 file re- corded on CD-ROM. (Refer to page 86 for files that can be played back.) ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up playback and the sound being issued. This is particularly the case when playing back multi-session and many folders. When being read in, FORMA T READ is displayed. ! Playback is carried out in order of file number . F olders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast for ward or reverse operations are used. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Stopping playback % T ouch g . # When you stop MP3 playback by touching g , that location on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o play back the disc again, touch f . Introduction of advanced MP3 operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play F or MP3 playback, there are three repeat play ranges: FOLDER (folder repeat), TRACK (one- track repeat) and DISC (repeat all tracks). Playing MP3 En 41 Section 09 Playing MP3
1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch REPEA T. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the repeat range. ! FOLDER î Repeat the current folder ! TRACK î Repeat just the current track ! DISC î Repeat all tracks Notes ! If you select other folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRACK, the repeat play range changes to FOLDER . ! When FOLDER is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . ! When playing discs with MP3 files and audio data (CD -DA), repeat play per forms within the currently playing data type even if DISC is selected. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, FOLDER and DISC . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch RANDOM. 3 T ouch a to turn random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected FOLDER or DISC ranges. # T o turn random play off , touch b . Scanning folders and tracks While you are using FOLDER, the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using DISC , the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch SCAN. 3 T ouch a to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur- rent folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. 4 When you find the desir ed track (or folder) touch b to turn scan play off. Note After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Pausing MP3 playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f during playback. The icon e is displayed for four seconds and playback is paused. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Note Y ou can also turn on or off pause function using P AUSE . T o display P AUSE , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . Playing MP3 En 42 Section 09
Searching for a desired track in the current folder Y ou can use the search function to specify a track to search for a desired track. ! T rack search is not possible when disc play- back has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH and then touch TRACK. 2 T ouch 0 îÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . ! T o select 3, touch 3 . ! T o select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order . # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C . # Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . 3 While the input number is displayed, touch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected track. Note Y ou can also per form the same operations using SEARCH . T o display SEARCH , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . Displaying text information on MP3 disc T ext information recorded on a MP3 disc can be displayed. % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Folder (folder name) î File (file name) î T rackTitle (track title) î Artist (artist name) î Album (album title) î Comment (comment) î BitRate (bit rate) # When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the bit rate value is not dis- played even after switching to bit rate. ( VBR will be displayed.) # If specific information has not been recorded on a MP3 disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO NAME ). Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 19 letters only of Folder , File, T rackTitle , Artist , Album and Comment . When the recorded information is longer than 19 letters, you can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the text informa- tion can be seen. % Keep touching DISP until the text infor - mation begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the text informatio n will appear in the display . Selecting folders from the folder name list F older name list lets you see the list of folder names on an MP3 disc and select one of them to playback. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch FOLDER LIS. 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT to switch between the lists of names. 3 T ouch your favorite folder name. That selection will begin to play . Playing MP3 En 43 Section 09 Playing MP3
Listening a CD 1 3 4 2 5 Y ou can use this unit to control a multi- CD player , which is sold separately . These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your multi- CD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 Disc number indicator Shows the disc currently playing. 3 T rack number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 5 Disc list display Shows the disc title list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch M-CD to select the multi-CD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch any of 01 îÂÂ06 to select a disc you want to listen to. If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12, touch PREV or NEXT to display 07 î 12 . # When 01 î 06 and 07î 12 are not displayed, you can display them by touching DISP . # Y ou can also sequentially select a disc by using a /b . 4 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch c or d . T ouching d skips to the start of the next track. T ouching c once skips to the start of the cur- rent track. T ouching again will skip to the pre- vious track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick left or right. 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching c or d . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by holding the joystick left or right. Notes ! When the multi-CD player per forms the pre- parator y operations, READY is displayed. ! If the multi-CD player does not operate prop- erly , an error message such as ERROR-11 may be displayed. Refer to the multi-CD player owner îÂÂs manual. ! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player ma- gazine, NO DISC is displayed. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . 50-disc multi-CD player Only those functions described in this manual are supported for 50-disc multi-CD players. Multi-CD Player En 44 Section 10
Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the multi-CD player: M-CD (multi-CD player re- peat), TRACK (one-track repeat) and DISC (disc repeat). 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch REPEA T. 2 T ouch j to select the repeat range. T ouch j repeatedly until the desired repeat range appears in the display . ! M-CD î Repeat all discs in the multi-CD player ! TRACK î Repeat just the current track ! DISC î Repeat the current disc # Y ou can also select the repeat range by mov- ing the joystick left or right. Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to M-CD . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRACK, the repeat play range changes to DISC . Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, M-CD and DISC . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch RANDOM. 3 T ouch a to turn random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected M-CD or DISC ranges. # T o turn random play off , touch b . Multi-CD Player En 45 Section 10 Multi-CD Player
Scanning CDs and tracks While you are using DISC, the beginning of each track on the selected disc plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using M-CD, the beginning of the first track of each disc is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch SCAN. 3 T ouch a to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur- rent disc (or the first track of each disc) is played. 4 When you find the desir ed track (or disc) touch b to turn scan play off. Note After track or disc scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch P AUSE. 2 T ouch a to turn pause on. Play of the current track pauses. # T o turn pause off , touch b . Using ITS playlists ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a playlist of favorite tracks from those in the multi-CD player magazine. After you have added your favorite tracks to the playlist you can turn on ITS play and play just those selec- tions. Creating a playlist with ITS programming Y ou can use ITS to enter and playback up to 99 tracks per disc, up to 100 discs (with the disc title). (With multi- CD players sold before the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, up to 24 tracks can be stored in the playlist.) 1 Play a CD that you want to pro gram. T ouch a or b to select a CD. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NEXT. 3 T ouch ITS MEMORY. 4 T ouch c or d to select a desired track. 5 T ouch a to store the currently playing track in the playlist. MEMOR Y is displayed briefly and the cur- rently playing selection is added to your play- list. The display then shows track number again. Note After data for 100 discs has been stored in mem- or y , data for a new disc will over write the oldest one. Playback from your ITS playlist ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into your ITS playlist. When you turn on ITS play, tracks from your ITS playlist in the multi-CD player will begin to play . Multi-CD Player En 46 Section 10
1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on page 45. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NEXT. 3 T ouch ITS PLA Y. 4 T ouch a to turn ITS play on. Playback begins of those tracks from your playlist within the previously selected M-CD or DISC ranges. # If no tracks in the current range are pro- grammed for ITS play then ITS EMPTY is dis- played. # T o turn ITS play off , touch b . Erasing a track from your ITS playlist When you want to delete a track from your ITS playlist, you can if ITS play is on. If ITS play is already on, skip to step 2. 1 Play a CD you want to delete a track from your ITS playlist, and turn ITS play on. Refer to Playback from your ITS playlist on the previous page. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NEXT. 3 T ouch ITS MEMORY. 4 T ouch c or d to select a desired track. 5 T ouch b to erase a track from your ITS playlist. The currently playing selection is erased from your ITS playlist and playback of the next track from your ITS playlist begins. # If there are no tracks from your playlist in the current range, ITS EMPTY is displayed and nor- mal play resumes. Erasing a CD from your ITS playlist When you want to delete all tracks of a CD from your ITS playlist, you can if ITS play is off . 1 Play a CD that you want to delete. T ouch a or b to select a CD. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NEXT. 3 T ouch ITS MEMORY. 4 T ouch b to erase all tracks on the cur - rently playing CD from your ITS playlist. All tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from your playlist and ALL CLEAR is displayed. Using disc title functions Y ou can input CD titles and display the title. Then you can easily search for and select a de- sired disc for play. Entering disc titles Disc title input lets you input CD titles up to 10 letters long and up to 100 disc titles (with ITS playlist) into the multi- CD player . ! When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi- CD player , you cannot switch to TITLE EDIT . The disc title will have already been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. 1 Play a CD that you want to enter the title. T ouch a or b to select a CD. 2 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NEXT. Multi-CD Player En 47 Section 10 Multi-CD Player
3 T ouch TITLE EDIT. 4 T ouch ABC to select the desired charac- ter type. T ouch ABC repeatedly to switch between the following character type: Alphabet (upper case), numbers and symbols î Alphabet (lower case) # Y ou can select to input numbers and symbols by touching 123 . 5 T ouch a or b to select a letter of the al- phabet. Each time you touch a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C ... X Y Z , numbers and symbols in 1 2 3 ... | } ï order . Each time you touch b will display a letter in the reverse order , such as Z Y X ... C B A order . 6 T ouch d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the desired letter is displayed, touch d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . T ouch c to move backwards in the display. 7 T ouch OK to store the entered title in memory . 8 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . Notes ! Titles remain in memor y , even af ter the disc has been removed from the magazine, and are recalled when the disc is reinserted. ! After data for 100 discs has been stored in memor y , data for a new disc will over write the oldest one. Displaying disc titles Y ou can display the title of any disc that has had a disc title entered. % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: DISC LIST (disc list) î DiscTitle (disc title) When you select DiscTitle , the title of the cur- rently playing disc is shown in the display. # If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, NO TITLE is displayed. Using CD TEXT functions Y ou can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player . Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist îÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these spe- cially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below . Displaying titles on CD TEXT dis cs % T ouch DISP. T ouch DISP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: DISC LIST (disc list) î DiscTitle (disc title) î DiscArtist (disc artist name)î T rackTitle (track title) î T .Artist (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO ART IST ). Multi-CD Player En 48 Section 10
Scrolling titles in the display This unit can display the first 19 letters only of DiscTitle , DiscArtist , T rackTitle and T .Artist . When the recorded information is longer than 19 letters, you can scroll the text to the lef t so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Keep touching DISP until the title be- gins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the display . Selecting tracks from the track title list T rack title list lets you see the list of track titles on a CD TEXT disc and select one of them to playback. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch TRACK LIST. 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT to switch between the lists of titles. 3 T ouch your favorite track title. That selection will begin to play . Using compr ession and bass emphasis Y ou can use these functions only with a multi- CD player that supports them. Using COMP (compression) and DBE (dy- namic bass emphasis) functions let you adjust the sound playback quality of the multi- CD player . Each of the functions have a two-st ep adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and softer sounds at higher volumes. DBE boosts bass levels to give play- back a fuller sound. Listen to each of the ef- fects as you select through them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch COMP. # If the multi-CD player does not support COMP/DBE, NO COMP is displayed when you at- tempt to select it. 2 T ouch j to select your favorite set- ting. T ouch j repeatedly to switch between the following settings: COMP OFF î COMP 1 î COMP 2 î COMP OFF î DBE 1 î DBE 2 # Y ou can also select the desired setting by mov- ing the joystick left or right. Multi-CD Player En 49 Section 10 Multi-CD Player
W atching the TV tuner 1 3 4 2 5 Y ou can use this unit to control a TV tuner , which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner îÂÂs operation manuals. This section provides information on TV operations with this unit which differs from that described in the TV tuner îÂÂs operation manual. 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 Band indicator Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to. 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected. 4 Channel indicator Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned. 5 Preset list display Shows the preset list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch TV to select the TV . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired band is displayed, TV1 or TV2 . 4 T o perform manual tuning, touch c or d shortly . The channels move up or down step by step. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by mov- ing the joystick left or right. 5 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the channels until a broad- cast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by touching either c or d shortly . # If you keep touching c or d you can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys. # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by holding the joystick left or right. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 sec- onds, they will be hidden automatically . TV tuner En 50 Section 11
Introduction of advanced TV tuner operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the TV picture, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the TV picture. Storing and recalling broadcast stations If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P01 îÂÂP12 you can easily store up to 12 broad- cast stations for later recall with the touch of a key . % When you find a station that you want to store in memory keep touching a prese t tuning key P01 îÂÂP12 until the preset num- ber stops flashing. The number you have touched will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected station has been stored in mem- or y . The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key P01 îÂÂP12 the station is recalled from memor y . # T o switch between P01 îÂÂP06 and P07 îÂÂP12 , touch PREV or NEXT . # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. # When P01 î P06 and P07î P12 are not dis- played, you can display them by touching DISP . Notes ! Up to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TV bands can be stored in memor y . ! Y ou can also use a and b to recall stations assigned to preset tuning keys P01 îÂÂP12 . ! Y ou can also per form the same operations using P . CH MEMO . T o display P . CH MEMO , touch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION . Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch BSSM. 2 T ouch a to turn BSSM on. BSSM begins to flash. While BSSM is flashing the 12 strongest broadcast stations will be stored in order from the lowest channel up. When finished, BSSM disappears. # T o cancel the storage process, touch b . TV tuner En 51 Section 11 TV tuner
Note Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may re- place broadcast stations you have saved using P01 îÂÂP12 . Selecting the country group ! This function can be operated only when connecting a TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P6450TVP) featuring the countr y setting. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch COUNTR Y. 2 T ouch c or d to select the country group. T ouch c or d until the desired countr y group appears in the display . COUNTR Y 1 (CCIR channel) î COUNTRY 2 (IN channel) î COUNTRY 3 (CHN channel) î COUNTR Y 4 (U.K. channel) î COUNTRY 5 (OIRT channel) î COUNTRY 6 (AUSTRALIA channel) TV tuner En 52 Section 11
Playing a disc 1 3 5 6 2 4 Y ou can use this unit to control a DVD player or multi-DVD player , which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the DVD player îÂÂs or multi-DVD player îÂÂs operation manuals. This section provides information on DVD operations with this unit which differs from that described in the DVD player î so r multi-DVD player îÂÂs operation manual. ! Switch the remote control selection to sui- table setting to operate DVD players. (Refer to page 73.) ! Switch the remote control operation mode to DVD to operate the DVD player by using remote control. (Refer to page 14.) 1 Source icon Shows what the source has been selected. 2 Disc type indicator Shows the type of the currently playing disc. 3 Disc number indicator Shows the disc currently playing when using a multi-DVD player . 4 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing during DVD video playback. 5 Chapter/track number indicator Shows the chapter/track currently playing. 6 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent chapter/track. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch S-DVD to select the DVD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another chapter/track, touch c or d shortly . # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another chapter/track by moving the joystick left or right. When using the joystick on the remote control, switch the remote control operation mode to AV H . (Refer to page 14.) 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by holding the joystick left or right. When using the joystick on the remote control, switch the remote control operation mode to AV H . (Refer to page 14.) Note If you do not use the touch panel keys for 30 sec- onds, they will be hidden automatically . T urning the DVD player on or off ! Only the remote control can operate this function. T o per form this function, switch the remote control operation mode to DVD . (Refer to page 14.) DVD Player En 53 Section 12 DVD Player
% Press REAR.S to turn the DVD player on. # T o turn the DVD player off , press REAR.S again. Selecting a disc ! Only when a multi-DVD player is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. % T ouch a or b to select a disc. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another disc by moving the joystick up or down. When using the joystick on the remote control, switch the remote control operation mode to AV H . (Refer to page 14.) # Y ou can also select a disc by pressing BACK or ENTERT AINMENT on the remote control when the remote control operation mode is switched to DVD . Introduction of advanced DVD player operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play ! During PBC playback of Video CDs, this function cannot be operated. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch REPEA T. DVD Player En 54 Section 12
2 T ouch c or d to select the re peat range. During DVD video playback ! TITILE î Repeat just the current title ! CHAPTER î Repeat just the current chapter ! DISC î Repeat the current disc During Video CD or CD playback ! TRACK î Repeat just the current track ! DISC î Repeat the current disc Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRACK, the repeat play range changes to DISC . Pausing disc playback 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch P AUSE. 2 T ouch a to turn pause on. # T o turn pause off , touch b . Playing tracks in a random order ! Y ou can operate this function only during CD playback. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch RANDOM. 2 T ouch a to turn random play on. T racks will play in a random order . # T o turn random play off , touch b . Scanning tracks of a CD ! Y ou can operate this function only during CD playback. 1 T ouch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch SCAN. 2 T ouch a to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 3 When you find the desir ed track touch b to turn scan play off. Using ITS playlists ! Only when a multi-DVD player is connected to this unit, you can operate these func- tions. ! This function differs slightly from ITS play- back with a multi- CD player . With multi- DVD player , ITS playback applies only to the CD playing. F or details, refer to Using ITS playlists on page 46. DVD Player En 55 Section 12 DVD Player
Introduction of audio adjustments 1 1 Audio display Shows the audio function names. Important If the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P7050) is connected to this unit, the audio function will be changed into the multi-channel processor î s audio menu. F or details, refer to Introduction of DSP adjustments on page 62. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch AUDIO to display the audio function names. The audio function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # If EQ-EX function has been selected and only when EQ-EX is turned on and CUSTOM is se- lected as the equalizer cur ve, you can switch to BASS and TREBLE . # Only when the subwoofer controller setting is PREOUT FULL , NON F ADING will be displayed instead of SUB WOOFER . (Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 75.) # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the audio function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the source display. Using balance adjustment Y ou can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch F AD/BAL. # When the rear output setting is REAR SP SUB. W , BALANCE will be displayed in- stead of FAD/BAL . Refer to Setting the r ear output and subwoofer controller on page 75. 2 T ouch a or b to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each time you touch a or b moves the front/ rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FRONT :15 î REAR:15 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FR:00 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. # When the rear output setting is REAR SP SUB. W , you cannot adjust front/rear speaker balance. Refer to Setting the r ear output and subwoofer controller on page 75. Audio Adjustments En 56 Section 13
3 T ouch c or d to adjust left/right speak- er balance. Each time you touch c or d moves the lef t/ right speaker balance towards the left or the right. LEFT :09 î RIGHT :09 is displayed as the left/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are six stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves: Display Equalizer curve SUPER BASS Super bass POWERFUL P ower ful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal CUSTOM Custom FLA T Flat ! CUSTOM is an adjusted equalizer cur ve that you create. ! A separate CUSTOM curve can be created for each source. If you make adjustments, the equalizer cur ve settings will be memor- ized in CUSTOM . ! When FLA T is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. % Press EQ to select the equalizer . P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: SUPER BASS î POWERFUL î NA TURAL î VOCAL î CUSTOM î FLA T Adjusting equalizer curves Y ou can adjust the currently selected equalizer cur ve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer cur ve settings are memorized in CUSTOM . ! Y ou can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (cur ve characteristics) of each currently selec ted cur ve band ( LOW / MID/ HIGH ). Level (dB) Center frequency Q=2N Q=2W F requency (Hz) 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch EQ MENU. 2 T ouch a or b to select the desired item. Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: BAND (bands) î LEVEL (equalizer level) î FREQUENCY (center frequency) î Q. F ACTOR (Q factor) 3 T ouch c or d to select the equalizer band to adjust. Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: LOW (low) î MID (mid) î HIGH (high) 4 T ouch b and then touch c or d to ad- just the level of the equalizer band. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the level of the equalization band. Audio Adjustments En 57 Section 13 Audio Adjustments
6 î î 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. 5 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the desired frequency . T ouch c or d until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display . Low : 40 î 80 î 100 î 160 (Hz) Mid: 200 î 500 î 1k î 2k (Hz) High: 3.15k î 8k î 10k î 12.5k (Hz) 6 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the desired Q factor . T ouch c or d until the desired Q factor ap- pears in the display . 2W î 1W î 1N î 2N Note If you make adjustments, CUSTOM curve is up- dated. Adjusting bass and treble Y ou can adjust bass and treble settings. ! If EQ-EX function has been selected and only when EQ-EX is turned on and CUSTOM is selected as the equalizer cur ve, you can adjust bass and treble set- tings. (Refer to Compensating for equalizer cur ves (EQ-EX) on page 60.) Adjusting bass Y ou can adjust the cut- off frequency and the bass level. ! If SFEQ has been set to FRONT1, bass ad- justment affects only the rear output: front output cannot be adjusted. (Refer to Setting the sound focus equalizer (SFEQ) on page 61.) 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch BASS. 2 T ouch c or d to select the desired fre- quency . T ouch c or d until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display . 40 î 63 î 100 î 160 (Hz) 3 T ouch a or b to adjust the bass level. Each time you touch a or b increases or de- creases the bass level. 6 î î 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Adjusting treble Y ou can adjust the cut- off frequency and the treble level. ! If SFEQ has been set to FRONT1 or FRONT2 , treble adjustment affects only the front output: rear output cannot be ad- justed. (Refer to Setting the sound focus equalizer (SFEQ) on page 61.) 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch TREBLE. 2 T ouch c or d to select the desired fre- quency . T ouch c or d until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display . 2.5k î 4k î 6.3k î 10k (Hz) 3 T ouch a or b to adjust the treble level. Each time you touch a or b increases or de- creases the treble level. 6 î î 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. Audio Adjustments En 58 Section 13
1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch LOUDNESS. 2 T ouch a to turn loudness on. # T o turn loudness off , touch b . 3 T ouch c or d to select a desired level. Each time you touch c or d selects level in the following order: LOW (low) î MID (mid) î HIGH (high) Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off . ! When the subwoofer output is on, you can adjust the cut-off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer . 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch SUB WOOFER. # When the subwoofer controller setting is PREOUT FULL , you cannot select SUB WOOFER . 2 T ouch d to turn subwoofer output on. # T o turn subwoofer output off , touch c . 3 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the phase of subwoofer output. T ouch d to select normal phase and NORMAL appears in the display. T ouch c to select reverse phase and REVERSE appears in the display . 4 T ouch b and then touch c or d to ad- just the output level of the subwoofer . Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the level of the subwoofer . 6 î î 6 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. 5 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect cut-off frequency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 50 î 80 î 125 (Hz) Only frequencies lower than those in the se- lected range are output from the subwoofer . Using non fading output When the non fading output setting is on, the audio signal does not pass through this unit î s low pass filter (for the subwoofer), but is out- put through the RCA output. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NON FADING. # When the subwoofer controller setting is only PREOUT FULL , you can select NON F ADING . (Refer to page 75.) 2 T ouch a to turn non fading output on. # T o turn non fading output off , touch b . 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the output level of the non fading. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the level of the non fading. 6 î î 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers, turn the HPF (high pass filter) on. Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers. Audio Adjustments En 59 Section 13 Audio Adjustments
1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch HPF. 3 T ouch a to turn high pass filter on. # T o turn high pass filter off , touch b . 4 T ouch c or d to select cut-off fre- quency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 50 î 80 î 125 (Hz) Note If you switch the SFEQ setting, the HPF function is automatically turned off . By turning the HPF function on after selecting the SFEQ setting, you can combine HPF function with SFEQ function. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad- just. 2 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 3 T ouch SLA. 4 T ouch a or b to adjust the source vo- lume. Each time you touch a or b increases or de- creases the source volume. 4 î î 4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM tuner volume level can also be ad- justed with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD and MP3 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! DVD and the optional DVD player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! AUX (auxiliar y input) and AV (video input) are set to the same source level adjustment vo - lume automatically . Compensating for equalizer curves (EQ-EX) The EQ-EX compensates for each equalizer cur ve. F urthermore, you can adjust bass and treble for each source when CUSTOM cur ve is selected. ! Y ou cannot use EQ-EX function and SFEQ function simultaneously. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch SFEQ/EQ-EX and then touch EQ-EX. 3 T ouch a to turn EQ-EX on. # T o turn EQ-EX off , touch b . Audio Adjustments En 60 Section 13
Setting the sound focus equalizer (SFEQ) Clarifying the sound image of vocals and in- struments allows the simple staging of a nat- ural, pleasant sound environment. Even greater listening enjoyment will be obtained if seating positions are chosen carefully . FRONT1 boosts the treble on the front output and the bass on the rear output. FRONT2 boosts the treble and the bass on the front out- put and the bass on the rear output. (The bass boost is the same for both front and rear .) F or both FRONT1 and FRONT2 , H setting provides a more pronounced effect than L setting. ! Y ou cannot use EQ-EX function and SFEQ function simultaneously. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch SFEQ/EQ-EX and then touch SFEQ. 3 T ouch a or b to select the desired SFEQ setting. T ouch a or b repeatedly to switch between the following settings: SFEQ OFF (off) î FRONT1-H (front 1-high) î FRONT1-L (front 1-low)î FRONT2-H (front 2-high) î FRONT2-L (front 2-low) î CUSTOM (custom) 4 T ouch c or d to select the desired posi- tion. T ouch c or d until the desired position ap- pears in the display . LEFT (left) î CENTER (center) î RIGHT (right) Notes ! If you adjust the bass or treble, CUSTOM memorizes an SFEQ setting in which the bass and treble are adjusted for personal prefer- ence. ! If you switch the SFEQ setting, the HPF func- tion is automatically turned off . By turning the HPF function on after selecting the SFEQ set- ting, you can combine HPF function with SFEQ function. Audio Adjustments En 61 Section 13 Audio Adjustments
Introduction of DSP adjustments 1 Y ou can use this unit to control multi-channel processor (DEQ-P7050), which is sold sepa- rately . By carr ying out the following settings/adjust- ments in order , you can create a finely-tuned sound field effortlessly . 1 Setting the speaker setting 2 Using the position selector 3 Adjusting the time alignment 4 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 5 Selecting a cut- off frequency 6 Adjusting the speaker output levels 7 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer 1 DSP display Shows the DSP function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch AUDIO to display the DSP function names. The DSP function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch to D. R. C or DUAL MONO . # When neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is se- lected in POSITION, you cannot switch to TIME ALIGN . # When neither CUSTOM1 nor CUSTOM2 is se- lected as an equalizer cur ve, you cannot switch to PEQ . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the DSP function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the source display. Using the sound field contr ol The SFC function creates the sensation of a live per formance. ! The acoustics of different per formance en- vironments are not the same and depend on the extent and contour of space through which sound waves move and on how sounds bounce off the stage, walls, floors and ceilings. At a live per formance you hear music in three stages: direct sound, early reflections, and late reflections, or re- verberations. Those factors are programed into the SFC circuitr y to recreate the acous- tics of various per formance settings. 1 Press EQ and hold to switch to SFC function. P ress EQ and hold until SFC appears in the display . # T o switch to equalizer function , press EQ and hold again. Digital Signal Processor En 62 Section 14
2 Press EQ to select the desired SFC mode. P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing mode: MUSICAL (musical) î DRAMA (drama) î ACTION (action)î JAZZ (jazz)î HALL (hall) î CLUB (club)î OFF (off) Note If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2- channel Dolby Digital audio and you select SFC effects that are most applicable for 5.1-channel audio (i.e., MUSICAL, DRAMA or ACTION ), we recommend turning Dolby Pro Logic on. On the other hand, when selecting SFC effects that are intended for use with 2-channel audio (i.e., JAZZ , HALL or CLUB ), we recommend turning Dolby P ro Logic off . Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automati- cally adjust the speaker output levels and in- serts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. When used in con- junction with the SFC, the feature will make the sound image more natural and offer a pa- noramic sound that envelops you. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch POSITION. 2 T ouch c /d /a /b to select a listening po- sition. T ouch one of these, c /d /a /b, to select a lis- tening position as listed in the table. Key Display Position c FRONT -L F ront seat left d FRONT -R F ront seat right a FRONT F ront seats b ALL All seats # T o cancel the selected listening position, touch the same key again. Note When you make adjustments for listening posi- tion, the speakers are automatically set for appro- priate output levels. Y ou can tailor them if you want as discussed under the heading of Adjust- ing the speaker output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the speaker output levels . Using balance adjustment Y ou can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch F AD/BAL. 2 T ouch a or b to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each time you touch a or b moves the front/ rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FRONT :25 î REAR:25 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FR:00 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust left/right speak- er balance. Each time you touch c or d moves the lef t/ right speaker balance towards the left or the right. Digital Signal Processor En 63 Section 14 Digital Signal Processor
LEFT :25 î RIGHT :25 is displayed as the left/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad- just. 2 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch SLA. 3 T ouch a or b to adjust the source vo- lume. Each time you touch a or b increases or de- creases the source volume. 4 î î 4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM tuner volume level can also be ad- justed with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD and MP3 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! DVD and the optional DVD player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! AUX (auxiliar y input) and AV (video input) are set to the same source level adjustment vo - lume automatically . Using the dynamic range control The dynamic range refers to the difference be- tween the largest and softest sounds. The dy- namic range control compresses this difference so that you can clearly hear sounds even at low volume levels. ! The dynamic range control is effective only on Dolby Digital sounds. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch D. R. C. # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch this mode. 2 T ouch a to turn the dynamic range con- trol on. # T o turn dynamic range control off , touch b . Using the dual mono mode When playing a disc recorded on a dual mono mode, you can select the channel to output. ! This function is effective only on dual mono mode sound. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch DUAL MONO. # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch this mode. 2 T ouch c or d to select the desired out- put setting. T ouch c or d until the desired output setting appears in the display . L R (left and right channels) î LEFT (left channel) î RIGHT (right channel) Digital Signal Processor En 64 Section 14
Using the direct contr ol Y ou can override audio settings to check for ef- fectiveness of your audio settings. ! All audio functions are locked out during the direct control is on except VOLUME . 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch DIRECT. 2 T ouch a to turn the direct control on. # T o turn direct control off , touch b . Using the Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic gives enhanced spatial and di- rectional effects, creating theater-like sense of presence and ambience. ! If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2-channel Dolby Digital audio and you se- lect SFC effects that are most applicable for 5.1-channel audio (i.e., MUSICAL , DRAMA or ACTION ), we recommend turn- ing Dolby P ro Logic on. On the other hand, when selecting SFC effects that are in- tended for use with 2-channel audio (i.e., JAZZ , HALL or CLUB ), we recommend turn- ing Dolby P ro Logic off . 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch DOLBY PL. 3 T ouch a to turn the Dolby Pr o Logic on. # T o turn Dolby P ro Logic off , touch b . Note When playing a 2-channel mono source with Pro Logic turned on, there may be occasions when the following will occur: ! No audio is output if the center speaker set- ting is SMALL or LARGE and no center speak- er is installed. ! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if installed and the center speaker setting is SMALL or LARGE . Setting the speaker setting Y ou need to make with/without (or yes/no) and size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/ad- justments depending on the installed speak- ers. The size needs to be set to LARGE (large) if the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds of about 100 Hz or below . Other wise select SMALL (small). ! Low frequency range is not output if the subwoofer is set to OFF and the front and rear speakers set to SMALL or OFF . ! It is imperative that non-installed speakers be set to OFF . ! Set the front or rear speaker to LARGE if the speaker is capable of reproducing bass content, or if no subwoofer is installed. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch SP SET. 3 T ouch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) î CENTER (center speaker) î REAR (rear speakers) î SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) î PHASE (sub- woofer setting) # Y ou can switch to PHASE only when the sub- woofer has been set to ON . Digital Signal Processor En 65 Section 14 Digital Signal Processor
4 T ouch c or d to select the correct size for the selected speaker . Each time you touch c or d selects the size in the following order: OFF (off) î SMALL (small) î LARGE (large) # Y ou cannot select OFF, when FRONT (front speakers) have been selected. # Y ou can select ON or OFF , when SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) has been selected. # Y ou can switch REVERSE (reverse phase) or NORMAL (normal phase), when PHASE (subwoo- fer setting) has been selected. Correcting the subwoofer î s phase If tr ying to boost the bass output of the sub- woofer doesn îÂÂt do much or rather makes you feel that the bass gets more murky , this may indicate that the subwoofer îÂÂs output and bass content you hear over other speakers cancel each other out. T o remove this problem, tr y changing the phase setting for the subwoofer . 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch SP SET. 3 T ouch a or b to select SUB WOOFER (subwoofer). Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) î CENTER (center speaker) î REAR (rear speakers) î SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) î PHASE (sub- woofer setting) 4 T ouch d to turn subwoofer output on. # T o turn subwoofer output off , touch c . 5 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the phase of subwoofer output. T ouch d to select normal phase and NORMAL appears in the display. T ouch c to select reverse phase and REVERSE appears in the display . Note When playing a 2-channel mono source with Pro Logic turned on, there may be occasions when the following will occur: ! No audio is output if the center speaker set- ting is SMALL or LARGE and no center speak- er is installed. ! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if installed and the center speaker setting is SMALL or LARGE . Selecting a cut-off frequency Y ou can select a frequency, under which sounds are reproduced through the subwoo- fer . If the installed speakers include one whose size has been set to SMALL, you can select a frequency , under which sounds are repro- duced through a LARGE speaker or subwoo- fer . 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch CUT OFF. 3 T ouch c or d to select cut-off fre- quency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 63 î 80 î 100 î 125 î 160 î 200 (Hz) Note Selecting a cut-off frequency is to set a cut-off fre- quency of the subwoofer î s L.P .F . (low-pass filter) and that of the SMALL speaker H .P .F . (high-pass filter). The cut-off frequency setting has no effect if the subwoofer is set to OFF and other speakers are set to LARGE or OFF . Digital Signal Processor En 66 Section 14
Adjusting the speaker output levels Y ou can readjust the speaker output levels using a test tone while listening to music. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch SP LEVEL. 3 T ouch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT L (front speaker left) î CENTER (center speaker) î FRONT R (front speaker right) î REAR R (rear speaker right)î REAR L (rear speaker lef t) î SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set OFF . 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 î îÂÂ10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. Note T o adjust the speaker output levels at this mode is the same as making the speaker output levels at TEST TONE . Both provide the same results. Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone A convenient test tone allows you to easily get the overall balance right among the speakers. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch TEST TONE. 3 T ouch ST ART to start the test tone out- put. The test tone is output. It rotates from speaker to speaker in the following sequence at inter- vals of about two seconds. The current set- tings for the speaker over which you hear the test tone are shown in the display . FRONT L (front speaker left) î CENTER (center speaker) î FRONT R (front speaker right) î REAR R (rear speaker right)î REAR L (rear speaker lef t) î SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) Check each speaker output level. If no adjust- ments are needed, per form step 5 to stop the test tone. # Y ou can also start the test tone output by mov- ing the joystick up. # The settings do not appear for speakers whose size is set OFF . 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 î îÂÂ10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. # The test tone rotates to the next speaker af ter about two seconds from the last operation. 5 T ouch STOP to stop the test tone out- put. # Y ou can also stop the test tone output by mov- ing the joystick down. Notes ! If needed, select speakers and adjust their î ab- solute î output levels. (Refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels on this page.) ! T o adjust the speaker output levels at this mode is the same as making the speaker out- put levels at SP LEVEL. Both provide the same results. Digital Signal Processor En 67 Section 14 Digital Signal Processor
Adjusting the time alignment By adjusting the distance between each speaker and a selected listening position, you can insert delay times into the speaker output to obtain a correct sound image and overall level balance. Although this is automatically achieved when you set the listening position, the time alignment feature provides a fine ad- justment. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch TIME ALIGN. # Y ou cannot select TIME ALIGN when neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is selected in POSITION . 3 T ouch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT L (front speaker left) î CENTER (center speaker) î FRONT R (front speaker right) î REAR R (rear speaker right)î REAR L (rear speaker lef t) î SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set OFF . 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the distance be- tween the selected speaker and the listen- ing position. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the distance. 0.0 î 500.0 [cm] is dis- played as the distance is increased or decreased. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves: Display Equalizer curve SUPER BASS Super bass POWERFUL P ower ful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal FLA T Flat CUSTOM1 Custom 1 CUSTOM2 Custom 2 ! CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 are adjusted equalizer cur ves. ! When FLA T is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. 1 Press EQ and hold to switch to equali- zer function. P ress EQ and hold until an equalizer cur ve name appears in the display . # T o switch to SFC function, press EQ and hold again. 2 Press EQ to select the equalizer . P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: SUPER BASS î POWERFUL î NA TURAL î VOCAL î FLA T î CUSTOM1 î CUSTOM2 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer Fo r CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 equalizer cur ves, you can adjust the front, rear and cen- ter equalizer cur ves separately by selecting a Digital Signal Processor En 68 Section 14
center frequency, an equalizer level and a Q factor for each band. ! A separate CUSTOM1 curve can be cre- ated for each source. ! A CUSTOM2 cur ve can be created com- mon to all sources. ! The center speaker largely determines the sound image and getting the balance right isn îÂÂt easy . W e recommend reproducing a 2- ch. audio (a CD for example) and getting the balance right among the speakers ex- cept for the center , and then reproducing a 5.1-ch. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and ad- justing the center speaker output to the balance you have already got among the other speakers. 1 T ouch A.MENU and AUDIO and then touch NEXT twice. 2 T ouch PEQ. # Y ou cannot select PEQ when neither CUSTOM1 nor CUSTOM2 equalizer cur ve is se- lected. 3 T ouch a or b to select the desired item. Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: SP-SEL (speakers) î BAND (bands) î FREQUENCY (center frequency)î LEVEL (equalizer level) î Q. FACTOR (Q factor) 4 T ouch c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. T ouch c or d until the desired speaker ap- pears in the display . REAR (rear speakers) î CENTER (center speak- er) î FRONT (front speakers) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set OFF . 5 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the equalizer band to be adjusted. Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: LOW (low) î MID (mid) î HIGH (high) 6 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the center frequency of selected band. T ouch c or d until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display . 100 î 125 î 160 î 200 î 250 î 315 î 400 î 500 î 630 î 800 î 1k î 1.25k î 1.6k î 2k î 2.5k î 3.15k î 4k î 5k î 6.3k î 8k (Hz) 7 T ouch b and then touch c or d to ad- just the equalizer level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the equalizer level. 06 î îÂÂ06 is dis- played as the level is increased or decreased. 8 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the desired Q factor . Each time you touch c or d switches between the following Q factor: WIDE (wide) î NARROW (narrow) # Y ou can adjust parameters for each band of the other speakers in the same way . Note Y ou can select a center frequency from among 20 frequencies for each band. Y ou can change the center frequency in 1/3-octave steps, but you can- not select frequencies that have inter vals shorter than 1 octave among the center frequencies of the three bands. Digital Signal Processor En 69 Section 14 Digital Signal Processor
Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 1 Y ou can use this menu to change audio, subti- tle, parental lock and other DVD settings. ! When watching a DVD/Video CD on the rear display independently , you cannot op- erate this menu. 1 DVD setup menu display Shows the DVD setup menu names. 1 T ouch g . SETUP will be displayed instead of MENU . 2 T ouch SETUP when the disc is stopped. The DVD setup menu is displayed. # When SETUP is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display DVD SETUP by pressing MENU on the remote control when the disc is stopped. 3 T ouch either LANGUAGE or VISUAL to display the DVD setup function names. The DVD setup function names in selected menu are displayed. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the DVD setup function within about 30 seconds, the display is automati- cally returned to the playback display . Setting the subtitle language Y ou can set a desired subtitle language. If the selected subtitle language is recorded on the DVD, subtitles are displayed in that language. 1 T ouch SETUP and LANGUAGE and then touch SUB. T LANG. A subtitle language menu is displayed and the currently set language is highlighted. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT . # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV . 2 T ouch the desired language. A subtitle language is set. # If you have selected OTHERS, refer to When you select OTHERS on the next page . Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is displayed. ! Y ou can also switch the subtitle language by touching SUB.T during playback. (Refer to Changing the subtitle language during play- back (Multi-subtitle) on page 30.) ! Even if you use SUB.T to switch the subtitle language, this does not affect the settings here. Setting up the DVD player En 70 Section 15
When you select OTHERS When you select OTHERS, a language code input display is shown. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 89 to input the four digit code of the desired language. 1 T ouch 0 îÂÂ9 to input the language code. # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C . # Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . 2 While the input number is displayed, touch ENTER. Setting the audio language Y ou can set the preferred audio language. 1 T ouch SETUP and LANGUAGE and then touch AUDIO LANG. An audio language menu is displayed and the currently set language is highlighted. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT . # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV . 2 T ouch the desired language. The audio language is set. # If you have selected OTHERS, refer to When you select OTHERS on this page . Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is output. ! Y ou can also switch the audio language by touching AUDIO during playback. (Refer to Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) on page 30.) ! Even if you use AUDIO to switch the audio language, this does not affect the settings here. Setting the menu language Y ou can set the preferred language for dis- plays of menus recorded on a disc. 1 T ouch SETUP and LANGUAGE and then touch MENU LANG. A menu language menu is displayed and the currently set language is highlighted. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT . # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV . 2 T ouch the desired language. The menu language is set. # If you have selected OTHERS, refer to When you select OTHERS on this page . Note If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is dis- played. Setting assist subtitles on or off Assist subtitles offer explanations for the au- rally impaired. However , they are only dis- played if they are recorded on the DVD. Y ou can turn assist subtitles on or off as de- sired. 1 T ouch SETUP and LANGUAGE and then touch NEXT. Setting up the DVD player En 71 Section 15 Setting up the DVD player
2 T ouch A SUB TITL. 3 T ouch a to turn assist subtitles on. # T o turn assist subtitles off , touch b . Setting angle icon display Y ou can set up that the angle icon appears on scenes where the angle can be switched. 1 T ouch SETUP and VISUAL and then touch M. ANGLE. 2 T ouch a to turn angle icon display on. # T o turn angle icon display off , touch b . Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display . A wide screen display has a width-to -height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display connected to REAR MONITOR OUT . ! When using a regular display , select either LETTER BOX or P ANSCAN . Selecting 16 : 9 may result in an unnatural picture. ! If you select the TV aspect, this unit î s dis- play changes to the same setting. 1 T ouch SETUP and VISUAL and then touch TV ASPECT. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the TV aspect. ! 16 : 9 î Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis- played as it is (initial setting) ! LETTER BOX î The picture is the shape of a letter box with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen ! P ANSCAN î The picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify P ANSCAN , playback is with LETTER BOX even if you select the P ANSCAN setting. Con- firm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. (See page 8.) ! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc î si n - structions. Setting the parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict the viewing of violent and adult oriented scenes by children. Y ou can set the parental lock level in steps as desired. ! When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis- played. In this case, playback will begin when the correct code number is input. Setting the code number and level When you first use this function, register your code number . If you do not register a code number , parental lock will not operate. 1 T ouch SETUP and VISUAL and then touch P ARENT AL. 2 T ouch 0 îÂÂ9 to input a four digit code number . 3 While the input number is displayed, touch ENTER. The code number is set, and you can now set the level. Setting up the DVD player En 72 Section 15
4 T ouch any of 1 îÂÂ8 to select the desir ed level. The parental lock level is set. ! LEVEL 8 î Playback of the entire disc is pos- sible (initial setting) ! LEVEL 7 î LEVEL 2 î Playback of discs for children and non-adult oriented discs is possible ! LEVEL 1 î Playback of discs for children only is possible Notes ! W e recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. ! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. Y ou can confirm it by looking at the disc pack- age, included literature or on the disc itself . With discs that do not feature a recorded par- ental lock level, you cannot use parental lock. ! With some discs, parental lock operates to skip certain scenes only , after which normal playback resumes. F or details, refer to the disc îÂÂs instructions. Changing the level Y ou can change the set parental lock level. 1 T ouch SETUP and VISUAL and then touch P ARENT AL. 2 T ouch 0 îÂÂ9 to input the registered code number . 3 T ouch ENTER. This enters the code number , and you can now change the level. # If you input an incorrect code number , the icon is displayed. T ouch C and input the cor- rect code number . # If you forget your code number , refer to If you forget your code number on this page. 4 T ouch any of 1 îÂÂ8 to select the desir ed level. The new parental lock level is set. If you forget your code number Refer to Changing the level on this page, and touch C 10 times. The registered code number is canceled, letting you register a new one. Setting r emote control code type When the remote control operation switch is set to DVD, changing the remote control code type enables you to operate the P ioneer DVD player by the supplied remote control. There are three remote codes, code type A, code type B and code type AV H . When using this unit with a multi-DVD player (e.g. XDV -P9), se- lect code A. When using this unit only, select code AV H . ! With this unit, code B cannot be used. 1 Set the remote control selection switch on the left side of the remote control to the approp riate position with a pen tip or other pointed instrument . ! If you select AV H mode, there is no need to take the following procedure. ! If you select A /B mode, take the following procedure and change the code type to the appropriate type. 2 Press 7 and 0 on the remote control si- multaneously to change the code type. Initially , the code type is set to A. Each time you press 7 and 0 simultaneously on the re- mote control the code type switches between A and B . Setting up the DVD player En 73 Section 15 Setting up the DVD player
Adjusting initial settings 1 Initial settings lets you per form initial set up of different settings for this unit. 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch SOURCE OFF to turn this unit off. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch A.MENU and then touch INITIAL to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # When the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ- P7050) is connected to this unit, you can operate DIGTL A TT instead of REAR SP . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Setting the FM tuning step The FM tuning step employed by seek tuning can be switched between 100 kHz, the preset step, and 50 kHz. 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch FM STEP. 2 T ouch c or d to select the FM tuning step. T ouching c or d will switch the FM tuning step between 100 kHz and 50 kHz. The se- lected FM tuning step will appear in the dis- play . Note If seek tuning is per formed in 50 kHz steps, sta- tions may be tuned in imprecisely . T une in the sta- tions with manual tuning or use seek tuning again. Setting the AM tuning step The AM tuning step can be switched between 9 kHz, the preset step, and 10 kHz. When using the tuner in North, Central or South America, reset the tuning step from 9 kHz (531 î 1,602 kHz allowable) to 10 kHz (530 î 1,640 kHz allowable). 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch AM STEP. 2 T ouch c or d to select the AM tuning step. T ouching c or d will switch the AM tuning step between 9 kHz and 10 kHz. The selected AM tuning step will appear in the display. Initial Settings En 74 Section 16
Switching the war ning tone If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turni ng off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. Y ou can turn off the warning tone. 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch DT . W ARNING. 2 T ouch a to turn warning tone on. # T o turn warning tone off , touch b . Switching the auxiliary setting It is possible to use auxiliar y equipment with this unit. Activate the auxiliar y setting when using auxiliar y equipment connected to this unit. 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch AUX. 2 T ouch a to turn auxiliary setting on. # T o turn auxiliar y setting off , touch b . Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller This unit îÂÂs rear output (rear speaker leads out- put and RCA rear output) can be used for full- range speaker ( REAR SP FULL ) or subwoofer ( REAR SP SUB. W ) connection. If you switch the rear output setting to the REAR SP SUB. W , you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer without using an auxiliar y amp. Initially , the unit is set for rear full-range spea k- er connection ( REAR SP FULL ). When rear out- put are connected to full range speakers (when REAR SP FULL is selected), you can connect the RCA subwoofer output to a sub- woofer . In this case, you can select whether to use the subwoofer controller îÂÂs (low pass filter , phase) built-in PREOUT SUB.W or the auxili- ar y PREOUT FULL . ! When the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7050) is connected to this unit, you cannot operate this function. 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch REAR SP. 2 T ouch a or b to switch the rear output setting. T ouch a to select full-range speaker and REAR SP FULL appears in the display . T ouch b to select subwoofer and REAR SP SUB. W ap- pears in the display . # When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select REAR SP FULL . # When a subwoofer is connected to the rear output, set for subwoofer REAR SP SUB. W . # When the rear output setting is REAR SP SUB. W , you cannot change the sub- woofer controller . 3 T ouch c or d to switch the subwoofer output or non fading output. T ouch c to select subwoofer output and PREOUT SUB.W appears in the display . T ouch d to select non fading output and PREOUT FULL appears in the display . Notes ! Even if you change this setting, there is no output unless you turn the non fading output (refer to Using non fading output on page 59) or subwoofer output (refer to Using subwoofer output on page 59) in the audio menu on. ! If you change the subwoofer controller , sub- woofer output and non fading output in the audio menu return to the factor y settings. Initial Settings En 75 Section 16 Initial Settings
! Both rear speaker leads output and RCA rear output are switched simultaneously in this setting. Correcting distort ed sound Y ou can minimize distortion likely caused by the equalizer cur ve settings. Setting an equalizer level high can cause dis- tortion. If high sound is crippled or distorted, tr y switching to LOW. Norma lly , leave the set- ting at HIGH to ensure quality sound. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7050) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch DIGTL A TT. 2 T ouch c or d to switch the digital at- tenuator setting. T ouch c to select low setting and LOW ap- pears in the display . T ouch d to select high setting and HIGH appears in the display . Switching the sound muting/attenuation Sound from this system is muted or attenu- ated automatically when a call is made or re- ceived using a cellular telephone connected to this unit. ! The sound is turned off , MUTE or AT T is displayed and no audio adjustment is pos- sible. ! Operation returns to normal when the phone connection is ended. 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch TEL/GUIDE. 3 T ouch c or d to select any of the mut- ing, attenuation or mixing. T ouch c or d until the desired setting appears in the display . ! MUTE î Muting ! AT T î Attenuation ! MIXING î Mixing # When the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ- P7050) is connected to this unit, you can select in the following setting: ! MUTE î Muting ! A TT20 î Attenuation (A TT20 has a stronger effect than A TT10 ) ! A TT10 î Attenuation ! MIXING î Mixing Switching the automatic disc playback Y ou can turn automatic disc playback on or off when you insert a disc into the disc loading slot. When this function is on, the disc will be automatically played after it is inserted into the disc loading slot. Initially , this function is set to on. 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch DVD AUTO. 3 T ouch a to turn automatic disc play- back on. # T o turn automatic disc playback off , touch b . Initial Settings En 76 Section 16
Switching the dimmer setting for sub-display T o prevent the sub-display from being too bright at night, the sub-display is automati- cally dimmed when the car îÂÂs headlights are turned on. Y ou can turn dimmer on or off . 1 T ouch A.MENU and INITIAL and then touch NEXT. 2 T ouch SUB. D DIM. 3 T ouch a to turn dimmer on. # T o turn dimmer off , touch b . Initial Settings En 77 Section 16 Initial Settings
Introduction of setup adjustments 1 1 Setup menu display Shows the setup function names. % T ouch A.MENU and then touch SETUP to display the setup function names. The setup function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # When A.MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. # Y ou can also display MENU by clicking the joystick. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the display of each source, touch ESC . Note If you do not operate the setup function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the source display. Setting the video input Y ou can switch the setting according to the connected component. ! Select VIDEO to watch video of a con- nected component as AV source. ! Select M-DVD to watch video of a con- nected DVD player as S-DVD source. 1 T ouch A.MENU and SETUP and then touch A V INPUT. 2 T ouch c or d to select the video input setting. T ouch c or d until the desired setting appears in the display . ! OFF î No video component is connected ! VIDEO î External video component ! M-DVD î DVD player connected with RCA cable # When a DVD player is connected with an AV - BUS cable, do not select M-DVD or else no pic- ture is displayed even if you select S-DVD . Setting for back-up camera This unit features a function that automatically switches to the back-up camera video ( BACK UP CAMERA IN jack) when a back-up camera is installed on your car . When the gear shif t is in REVERSE (R) position, the video automati- cally switches to a back-up camera video. (For more details, consult with your dealer .) ! W e recommend that you use a camera which outputs mirror reversed images. ! Confirm the setting immediately whether the display changes to a back-up camera video when the gear shift is moved to RE- VERSE (R) from another position. ! When the display changes to a back-up camera video during normal drivings, switch to another setting. ! T o return to the source display , press MENU on the head unit. 1 T ouch A.MENU and SETUP and then touch B-CAMERA. 2 T ouch a to turn back-up camera setting on. # T o turn back-up camera setting off , touch b . Other Functions En 78 Section 17
3 T ouch c or d to select an appropriate setting for polarity . Each time you touch c or d switches between the following polarity : ! BA TTER Y î When the polarity of the con- nected lead is positive while the gear shif t is REVERSE (R) position ! GND î When the polarity of the connected lead is negative while the gear shift is RE- VERSE (R) position Setting the automatic open function T o prevent the display from hitting the shift lever of an automatic vehicle when it is in P (park) position, or when you do not wish the display to open/close automatically, you can set the automatic open function in the manual mode. F urthermore, to adjust the LCD panel slide po - sition, you can turn the set back on or off . 1 T ouch A.MENU and SETUP and then touch FLAP SET. 2 T ouch a to turn the set back on, and the LCD panel slides to the back. # T o turn the set back off , touch b and the LCD panel slides to the front. 3 T ouch c or d to select the display to open/close automatically or manually . T ouch c to select MANUAL, and you have to press OPEN/CLOSE to open/close the display . T ouch d to select AUTO, and the display auto - matically opens/closes when power to this unit is turned on. Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 T ouch A.MENU and SETUP and then touch CLOCK ADJ. 2 T ouch OFF to turn the clock display on. ON will appear in the display instead of OFF . Clock display is now on. # Y ou can also turn the clock display on or off by pressing FLIP DOWN/CLOCK when the LCD panel is closed. # T o turn the clock display off , touch ON . 3 T ouch c or d to select the segment of the clock display you wish to set. Each time you touch c or d will select one segment of the clock display: Hour î Minute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will be highlighted. 4 T ouch a or b to set the clock. Each time you touch a will increase the se- lected hour or minute. Each time you touch b will decrease the selected hour or minute. Notes ! Y ou can match the clock to a time signal by touching JUST . î If the minute is 00î 29 , the minutes are rounded down. (e.g., 10:18 becomes 10:00 .) î If the minute is 30î 59 , the minutes are rounded up. (e.g., 10:36 becomes 11:00 .) ! Even when the sources are off , the clock dis- play appears on the display. Other Functions En 79 Section 17 Other Functions
Using the AUX source An IP -BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD -RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect this unit to auxiliar y equipment fea- turing RCA output. For more details, refer to the IP -BUS-RCA Interconnector owner îÂÂs man- ual. Selecting AUX as the source % T ouch the source icon and then touch AUX to select AUX as the source. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # If the auxiliar y setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. For more details, see Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 75. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, touch A.MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NAME EDIT. 2 T ouch ABC to select the desired charac- ter type. T ouch ABC repeatedly to switch between the following character type: Alphabet (upper case), numbers and symbols î Alphabet (lower case) # Y ou can select to input numbers and symbols by touching 123 . 3 T ouch a or b to select a letter of the al- phabet. Each time you touch a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C ... X Y Z , numbers and symbols in 1 2 3 ... | } ï order . Each time you touch b will display a letter in the reverse order , such as Z Y X ... C B A order . 4 T ouch d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the desired letter is displayed, touch d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . T ouch c to move backwards in the display. 5 T ouch OK to store the entered title in memory . 6 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . Switching the background display Y ou can switch background displays while lis- tening to each source. % Press ENTERT AINMENT. Each time you press ENTERT AINMENT the display changes in the following order: Audio source Background still picture î BGV (background visual) î AV (video input) î DVD (DVD player) Video source Video of currently selected source î Back- ground still picture î BGV (background visual) î AV (video input)î DVD (DVD player) Notes ! In the following cases, the background display will not change: Other Functions En 80 Section 17
î When the AV (video input) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 78). î When the DVD/Vide CD playback is not turned on for rear display (refer to page 17). ! Dolphin movie will not appear when the touch panel keys or the list is displayed. Using the PGM button Y ou can operate the preprogrammed functions for each source by using PGM . % Press PGM to tur n pause on when se- lecting the following sources: ! DVD î Built-in DVD player ! S-DVD î DVD player/multi-DVD player ! M-CD î Multi-CD player # T o turn pause off , press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to tur n BSM on when selecting TUNER as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to tur n BSSM on when selecting TV as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. Other Functions En 81 Section 17 Other Functions
T roubleshooting Common Symptom Cause Action (See) P ower doesn îÂÂt turn on. The unit doesn îÂÂt operate. Leads and connecto rs are incor- rectly connected . Confirm once mor e that all connect ions are correct. The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then replace the fuse. Be ver y sure to install the correct fuse with the same rate. Noise and other factors are causing the built-in microprocess or to oper- ate incorrectly. P ress RESET .( P a g e8 ) Operation wi th the remote con- trol isn îÂÂt possible. The unit does not operate cor- rectly even when the appropriate remote cont rol buttons are pressed. The remote control operation mode is incorr ect. Switch to the correct remote control mode. (P age 14) The remote control code is incor- rect. Make sure the remote control selection switch setting and code type setting are the same. (P age 73) Batter y powe r is low . Load new batter y. (P age 9) Some ope rations are prohibited with certain discs. Check usi ng another disc. Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty . Clean disc. (P age 85) The loaded disc is a type this unit cannot play . Check what type the disc is. Non compat ible video system disc is loaded. Change to a disc compatible to your video system. No sounds are heard. The volume level will not rise. Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly. The unit is per forming still, slow mo - tion or frame-by- frame playback . There is no sound during still, slow motion or frame-by-frame playback. There îÂÂs no picture. The parking brake cord is not con- nected. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The parking brake is not applied. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The icon is displ ayed, and op- eration is not possible. The operation is prohibited for the disc. This operation is not possible. The operation is not compatible with the disc î s organization. This operation is not possible. The picture stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. Reading of data has becom e impos- sible during playback . After pressing g once, start playback once more. There îÂÂs no sound. V olume level is low . The volume level is low . Adjust the volume level. The attenuator is on. T urn the attenuator off. There îÂÂs audio and video skip- ping. This unit is not firmly secured. Secure this unit firmly. The picture is stretched, the as- pect is incorrect. The aspect setting is incorrect for the displ ay . Select the appropriate setting for your display . (P age 72) Additional Information En 82 Appendix
Symptom Cause Action (See) Rear display picture disappears. The source disc being listened to with the head unit has been ejected. Before ejectin g the disc, switch the source. This problem may occur when certa in con- nection methods are used. When the ignition switch is turned ON (or turned to ACC), the motor sounds. This unit confirms whether a disc is loaded or not. This is a normal operation. Nothing is displayed. The touch pane l keys cannot use. The back-up camer a is not con- nected. B-CAMERA is incorrect setting. Connect a back-up camera. P ress MENU on the head unit to return to the source display and then select the correct set- ting for B-CAMERA . (P age 78) Problems during DVD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re- gion number from this unit. Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. (P age 6, P age 91) A parental lock message is dis- played and playback is not pos- sible. P arental lock is on. T urn parental loc k off or change the level. (P age 72) P arental lock cannot be can- celed. The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number . (P age 72) Y ou have forgot ten your code num- ber . P ress CLEAR 10 times to cancel the code number . (P age 73) Dialog langua ge (and subtitle language) cannot be switched. The DVD playing does not feature multiple language recordings . Y ou cannot switch among multiple languages if they aren îÂÂt recorded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature subtitles. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not re- corded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. Playback is not with the audio language and subti tle language settings selected in DVD SETUP . The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the langua ge selected in DVD SETUP . Switching to a selected language is not possi- ble if the language selected in DVD SETUP is not recorded on the disc. Switching the viewing angle is not possibl e. The DVD playing does not feature scenes shot from multiple angles. Y ou cannot switch betwee n multiple angles if the DVD does not feature sce nes recorded from multiple angles. Y ou are tr ying to switch to multiple angle viewing of a scene that is not recorded from multiple angles. Switch between multiple angle s when watch- ing scene s recorded from multiple angles. The picture is extremely unclear/ distorted and dark during play- back. The disc features a signal to prohibit copying. (Some discs may have this.) Since this unit is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system, when play- ing a disc that has a signal prohibiting copy- ing, the picture may suffer from horizontal stripes or other imper fections when viewed on some displays. This does not mean this unit is malfunctioning. Additional Information En 83 Appendix Additional Information
Problems during Video CD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) The PBC (playback control) menu display cannot be called up. The Video CD playing does not fea- ture PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs not featuring PBC. PBC is turned off . T urn PBC on. (P age 32, P age 35) Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. PBC is turned on. T urn PBC off . (P age 32, P age 35) Error messages When problems occur with disc playback, an error message appears on the display . Refer to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error persists, contact your dealer or your nearest PIONEER Ser vice Center . Message Cause Action (See) ERROR-02 Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Replace disc. ERROR-05 Electrical or mechanical P ress RESET . DIFFERENT REGION DISC (RE- GION ERR) The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct regio n number . NON PLA Y ABLE DISC (NON- PLA Y) This type of disc cannot be played by this unit Replace the disc with one this unit can play. The disc is loaded upside d own Check that the disc is loaded correctly . THERMAL PROTECTION IN MOTION (TEMP) The temperature of this unit is out- side of the normal operating range W ait until the unit î s temperature returns to within normal operating limits. Additional Information En 84 Appendix
DVD player and care ! Use only normal, round discs. If you insert irregular , non-round, shaped discs they may jam in the DVD player or not play prop- erly . ! Check all discs for cracks, scratches or warped discs before playing. Discs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly . Do not use such discs. ! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed side) sur face when handling the disc. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che- micals to the sur face of the discs. ! T o clean dirt from a disc, wipe the disc with a sof t cloth outward from the center of the disc. ! If the heater is used in cold weather , moist - ure may form on components inside the DVD player . Condensation may cause the DVD player to not operate properly. If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the DVD player for an hour or so to allow the DVD player to dr y out and wipe any damp discs with a sof t cloth to remove the moisture. ! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. DVD discs ! With some DVD video discs, it may not be possible to use certain functions. ! It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode). It is not possible to play back DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode). ! It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/ DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode), be- cause of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. ! It is not possible to play back DVD -ROM/ DVD-RAM discs. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD -R/CD-RW discs are used, play- back is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re- corder or a personal computer because of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. Additional Information En 85 Appendix Additional Information
! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) ! Playback of CD-R/C D-RW discs may be- come impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the sto - rage conditions in the car . ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD -RW disc may not be dis- played by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD -DA)). ! This unit conforms to the track skip func- tion of the CD -R/CD-RW disc. The tracks containing the track skip information are skipped automatically (in case of audio data (CD -DA)). ! If you insert a CD -RW disc into this unit, time to playback will be longer than when you insert a conventional CD or CD-R disc. ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD -RW discs before using them. MP3 files ! MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard. ! This unit allows playback of MP3 files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs. Disc re- cordings compatible with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system can be played back. ! It is possible to play back multi-session compatible recorded discs. ! MP3 files are not compatible with packet write data transfer . ! The max. number of characters which can be displayed for a file name, including the extension (.mp3), is 32 characters from the first character . ! The max. number of characters which can be displayed for a folder name is 32 charac- ters. ! In case of files recorded according to the Romeo and Joliet file system, only the first 32 characters can be displayed. ! When playing discs with MP3 files and audio data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA. ! The folder selection sequence for playback and other operations becomes the writing sequence used by the writing sof tware. For this reason, the expected sequence at the time of playback may not coincide with the actual playback sequence. However , there also is some writing software which per- mits setting of the playback order . ! Files are compatible with the ID3 T ag V er . 1.0 and V er . 1.1 formats for display of album (disc title), track (track title) and ar- tist (track artist). ! Only when MP3 files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequencies are played back, the emphasis function is valid. (16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz sampling frequencies can be played back.) ! There is no m3u playlist compatibility. ! There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3 interactive) or mp3 PRO format. ! The sound quality of MP3 files generally be- comes better with increasing bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy a certain sound quality , it is recom- mended to use only discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps. Important ! When naming an MP3 file, add the corre- sponding filename extension (.mp3). ! This unit plays back files with the filename ex- tension (.mp3) as an MP3 file. T o prevent Additional Information En 86 Appendix
noise and malfunctions, do not use this exten- sion for files other than MP3 files. About folders and MP3 files ! An outline of a CD-ROM with MP3 files on it is shown below . Subfolders are shown as folders in the folder currently selected. 3 1 2 1 First level 2 Second level 3 Third level Notes ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user can not assign folder numbers. ! It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3 files. (These folders will be skipped without displaying the folder number .) ! MP3 files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back. However , there is a delay in the start of playback on discs with numerous tiers. For this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers. ! It is possible to play back up to 253 items from folder on one disc. Using the display correctly CAUTION ! If moisture or foreign matter should get inside this unit, turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Using this unit in this condition may result in a fire or electric shock, or other failure. ! If you notice smoke, a strange noise or smell, or any other abnormal signs from the display , turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIO- NEER Ser vice Station. Using this unit in this condition may result in failure of the system. ! Do not disassemble or modify this unit, as there are high-voltage components inside which may cause an electric shock. Be sure to consult your dealer or the nearest author- ized PIONEER Ser vice Station for internal in- spection, adjustments or repairs. Handling the display ! When the display is subjected to direct sun- light for a long period of time, it will be- come ver y hot resulting in possible damage to the LCD screen. When not using this unit, close the display and avoid exposing it to direct sunlight as much as possible. Additional Information En 87 Appendix Additional Information
! The display should be used within the tem- perature ranges shown below . Operating temperature range: îÂÂ10 to 50 ðC Storage temperature range: îÂÂ20 to 80 ðC At temperatures higher or lower than the operating temperature range the display may not operate normally. ! The LCD screen of this unit is exposed in order to increase its visibility within the ve- hicle. Please do not press strongly on it as this may damage it. ! Do not place anything on the display when it is deployed. Also, do not attempt to carr y out angle adjustment, or open/close the display by hand. Applying strong force to the display may damage it. ! Do not push the LCD screen with much force as this may scratch it. ! Be careful not to place anything between the display and the main body when the display is opening or closing. If an object gets between the display and main body , the display may stop working. Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen ! If the display is near the vent of an air con- ditioner when it is opened, make sure that air from the air conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from the heater may break the LCD screen, and cool air from the cooler may cause moisture to form inside the dis- play resulting in possible damage. Also, if the display is cooled down by the cooler , the screen may become dark, or the life span of the small fluorescent tube used in- side the display may be shortened. ! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots) may appear on the LCD screen. These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a problem with the display . ! At low temperatures, the LCD screen may be dark for a while af ter the power is turned on. ! The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is exposed to direct sunlight. ! When using a portable phone, keep the an- tenna of the portable phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. Keeping the display in good condition ! When removing dust from the screen or cleaning the display , first turn the system power off , then wipe with the supplied cloth. ! When wiping the screen, take care not to scratch the sur face. Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners. Small fluorescent tube ! A small fluorescent tube is used inside the display to illuminate the LCD screen. î The fluorescent tube should last for ap- proximately 10,000 hours, depending on operating conditions. (Using the display at low temperatures reduces the ser vice life of the fluorescent tube.) î When the fluorescent tube reaches the end of its useful life, the screen will be dark and the image will no longer be projected. If this happens, consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIO - NEER Ser vice Station. Additional Information En 88 Appendix
Language code chart for DVD Language (code), input code L anguage (code), input code Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 P ashto, P ushto (ps), 1619 English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721 F rench (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814 German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Romanian (ro), 1815 Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyar wanda (r w), 1823 Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 P ortuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sangho (sg), 1907 Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo- Croatian (sh), 1908 Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911 Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Geor gian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915 Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Alban ian (sq), 1917 Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918 Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati ( ss), 1919 Aymara (ay), 012 5 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 T amil (ta), 2001 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 T elugu (te), 2005 Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 T ajik (tg), 2007 Bislama (bi), 0209 Laothian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008 Bengali (bn), 0214 Lithuan ian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian (lv), 1222 T urkmen (tk), 2011 Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 T agalog (tl), 2012 Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014 Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 T onga (to) , 2015 Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 T urkish (tr), 2018 W elsh (cy), 0325 Mongolian (mn ), 1314 T songa (ts), 2019 Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 T atar (tt), 2020 Bhutani ( dz), 0426 Marat hi (mr), 1318 T wi (tw), 2023 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Estonian (et), 0520 Malte se (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118 Basque (eu), 0521 Burme se (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126 P ersian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 Volapük (vo), 2215 Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no ), 1415 W olof (wo) , 2315 F aroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408 F risian (fy ), 0625 Oromo (om ), 1513 Y oruba (yo), 2515 Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu ), 2621 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 P anjabi (pa), 1601 Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612 Additional Information En 89 Appendix Additional Information
T erms Aspect ratio This is the width-to -height ratio of a TV screen. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps units (bits per second). The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. With DVD video discs fea- turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters. DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system delivering multi-channel audio from up to 6 independent channels. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in a MP3 file. This embedded in- formation can include the track title, the ar- tist îÂÂs name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 T ag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted to the number of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for- mat logic of CD -ROM folders and files. F or the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con- sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the î _î sign, with a file-extension of three charac- ters.) Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (in- cluding the separation mark î .î and a file ex- tension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. Generally , DVDs are re- corded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide higher sound quality . m3u Playlists created using the î WINAMP î soft- ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working Additional Information En 90 Appendix
group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan- dards Organization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a con- ventional disc. MPEG This stands for Moving P ictures Experts Group, and is an international video image compression standard. Some DVDs feature di- gital audio compressed and recorded using this system. Multi-angle With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV . Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let- ting you choose your viewing angle as desired. Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi- ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc, letting you choose as desired. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that al- lows additional data to be recorded later . When recording data on a CD -ROM, CD -R or CD-RW , etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses- sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses- sions in one disc. Multi-subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re- corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as desired. Optical digital output/input By transmitting and receiving audio signals in a digital signal format, the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of transmis- sion is minimized. An optical digital output/ input is designed to transmit and receive digi- tal signals optically . Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD -R , etc. at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. Parental lock Some DVD video discs with violent or adult- or- iented scenes feature parental lock which pre- vents children from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you set the unit îÂÂs parental lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these scenes will be skipped. Playback control (PBC) This is a playback control signal recorded on Video CDs (V ersion 2.0). Using menu displays provided by Video CDs with PBC lets you enjoy playback of simple interactive software and software with search functions. Y ou can also enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution still images. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos- sible unless it features the same region num- ber as the DVD player . This unit îÂÂs region number is displayed on the bottom of this unit. Title DVD video discs have high data capacity , en- abling recording of multiple movies on a sin- gle disc. If , for example, one disc contains three separate movies, they are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func- tions. Additional Information En 91 Appendix Additional Information
VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But to flexibly adjust the bit rate according to the needs of audio compression, it is possible to achieve compression priorities sound quality. Additional Information En 92 Appendix
Specifications General P ower source ............................. 1 4 . 4 V D C (10.8 î 15.1 V al- lowable) Grounding system ................... Negative type Head un it: Max. current consu mption ........................................... 1 0 . 0 A Dimensions (W àH àD): DIN Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 0 m m Nose ........................... 1 8 8 à5 8 à3 6 m m D Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 5 m m Nose ........................... 1 7 0 à4 6 à3 1 m m We i gh t ................................ 2 . 2 k g Hideaway unit: Max. current consu mption ........................................... 1 . 0 A Dimensions (W àH àD) ........................................... 1 5 0 à2 8 à1 0 0 m m We i gh t ................................ 0 . 3 k g Display Screen size/asp ect ratio ....... 6 . 5 i nc h w i d e / 1 6 : 9 (effective displ ay area: 146 à79 mm) Pi x e l s ............................................. 336,960 (1,440 à234) T y p e ................................................ T F T active matrix, transmis- sive type Color system .............................. NTSC/P AL compatible Operating temperature range ..................................................... î 10 î 50 ðC Storage temperature range ..................................................... î 20 î 80 ðC Angle adjustment .................... 5 0 î 110ð (initial settings: 110ð) Audio Continuous power output is 22 W per channe l minimum into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 to 15,000 Hz with no more than 5% THD. Maximum power output ....... 5 0 W à4 50 W à2/4 W 7 0WÃÂ1 / 2 W (for subwoofer) Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 î 8 W [2 W for 1 ch] al- lowable) P reout max out put level/output impedance ..................................................... 4 . 0 V / 1 0 0 W Equalizer (3-Band P arametric Equalizer): Low F requency ................ 4 0 / 8 0 / 1 0 0 / 1 6 0 H z Q Fa c t o r .................... 0 . 3 5 / 0 . 5 9 / 0 . 9 5 /1 . 1 5 ( 6 d B when boosted) G a i n ............................ ñ12dB Mid F requency ................ 200/500/1 k/2k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0 . 3 5 / 0 . 5 9 / 0 . 9 5 /1 . 1 5 ( 6 d B when boosted) G a i n ............................ ñ12dB High F requency ................ 3 . 15k/8k/10k/12.5k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0 . 3 5 / 0 . 5 9 / 0 . 9 5 /1 . 1 5 ( 6 d B when boosted) G a i n ............................ ñ12dB Loudness contour L o w ....................................... 3. 5 d B ( 1 0 0 H z ) , 3 d B ( 1 0 kHz) M i d ....................................... 1 0 d B ( 1 0 0 H z ), 6 . 5 d B (10 kHz) H i g h ..................................... 1 1 d B ( 1 00 H z ) , 1 1 d B (10 kHz) (volume: î 30 dB) T one controls: Bass F requency ................ 4 0 / 6 3 / 1 0 0 / 1 6 0 H z G a i n ............................ ñ12dB T reble F requency ................ 2 . 5 k / 4 k / 6 . 3 k / 1 0 k H z G a i n ............................ ñ12dB HPF : F requency .......................... 5 0 / 8 0 / 1 2 5 H z S l o pe .................................... î 12 dB/oct Subwoofer: F requency .......................... 5 0 / 8 0 / 1 2 5 H z S l o pe .................................... î 18 dB/oct G a i n ...................................... ñ12dB Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse DVD Player System .......................................... D V D v ideo, Video CD, Com- pact disc audio system Usable discs .............................. D V D v i deo, Video CD, Com- pact disc Region number: for Sou theast Asian models ........................................... 3 for Sou th American and Oceanian models ........................................... 4 Signal form at: Sampling frequency ..... 4 4 . 1 / 4 8 / 9 6 k H z Additional Information En 93 Appendix Additional Information
Number of quantization bits ........................................... 1 6 / 2 0 / 2 4 ; l i near F requency respo nse ............... 5 î 44,000 Hz (with DVD, at sampling frequenc y 96 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 9 7 d B ( 1 kHz) (IEC -A net- work) (CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IEC -A network)) Dynamic range ......................... 9 5 d B ( 1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB (1 kHz)) Distortion ..................................... 0 . 0 0 8 % ( 1 k H z ) Output level: V i d eo .................................... 1 . 0 V p - p / 7 5 W (ñ0.2 V) Audio ................................... 1 . 0 V ( 1 k H z , 0 d B ) Number of channels .............. 2 ( s t ereo) MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 FM tuner F requency ran ge ...................... 8 7. 5 î 108.0 MHz Usable sensiti vity ..................... 8 d B f ( 0 . 7 õ V / 7 5 W , mono, S/N: 30 dB) 50 dB quieting sensitivity ..... 1 0 d B f ( 0 . 9 õ V / 7 5 W , mono) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 7 5 d B ( I E C - A n e t work) Distortion ..................................... 0 . 3 % ( a t 6 5 d Bf, 1 kHz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz, mono) F requency respo nse ............... 3 0 î 15,00 0 Hz (ñ3 dB) Stereo separatio n .................... 4 5 d B ( at 6 5 d Bf, 1 kHz) AM tuner F requency ran ge ...................... 5 31 î 1,602 kHz (9 kHz ) 530 î 1,640 kHz (10 kHz) Usable sensiti vity ..................... 1 8 õ V ( S / N : 2 0 d B ) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 6 5 d B ( I E C - A n e t work) Infrared remote control W avelength ................................. 9 4 5 n m O u t pu t ........................................... t yp ; 1 0 m w/ s r p e r I n f rared LED Note Specifications and the design are subject to pos- sible modifications without notice due to im- provements. Additional Information En 94 Appendix
A Angle icon ................................................. . 31, . 72 Aspect ratio .............................................. . 72, . 90 Audio language .............................................. . 71 B Brightness ....................................................... . 21 C Chapter ............................................................ . 90 Code number .................................................. . 72 Color ................................................................ . 21 Condition memor y ........................................... .8 Contrast ........................................................... . 21 D Direct search ............................................ . 30, . 35 Dolby Digital ............................................... . 7, . 90 DTS .............................................................. . 7, . 90 H Hue .................................................................. . 21 L Language code chart .................................... . 89 Linear PCM (LPCM) ....................................... . 90 M Menu language .............................................. . 71 MPEG ............................................................... . 91 Multi-angle ................................................ . 31, . 91 Multi-audio ................................................ . 71, . 91 Multi-subtitle .......................... ................... . 70, . 91 O Optical digital output/input .......................... . 91 P P arental lock ............................................. . 72, . 91 PBC (playback control) ................................. . 32 Playback control (PBC) ................................. . 91 R Region number .......................................... . 6, . 91 S Subtitle language ........................................... . 70 T Title .................................................................. . 91 TV aspect ................................ ......................... . 72 V Video CD ........................................................... .6 W Wide screen mode ......................................... . 20 Index En 95
PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU , TOKY O 153-8654, JAP AN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA ) INC. P .O . Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U .S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: (0) 3/570.05 .11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-1111 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY . L TD. 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkwa y , Markham, Ontar io L3R OP2, Canada TEL: (905) 479-4411 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V . Blvd.Manuel Avila Cam acho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico , D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 H àá ý î Pl ø = l ø : ðî î - qî ï î õ 44 _ 13 î û q : (02) 2521-3588 H àû P î - îÂÂî îÂÂPl ø î / æ î U : î / î | c J ë S S 280 _ î L ÿ îÂÂ- à17 î 1704-06 ä û q : (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2003 by Pioneer Cor poration. All r ights reser ved. Printed in Japan <CRB1838-B> RC, RD <KMMZF/03C00000>